SlideShare a Scribd company logo
DSE8620 Operating Manual Issue 1 
+ 
DEEP SEA ELECTRONICS PLC 
DSE8620 Control Module Operating 
Manual 
Document number 057-142
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
2 
DEEP SEA ELECTRONICS PLC 
Highfield House 
Hunmanby 
North Yorkshire 
YO14 0PH 
ENGLAND 
Sales Tel: +44 (0) 1723 890099 
Sales Fax: +44 (0) 1723 893303 
E-mail : sales@Deepseaplc.com 
Website : www.deepseaplc.com 
DSE8620 Automatic Mains Failure (AMF) control Module. 
© Deep Sea Electronics Plc 
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any material form (including 
photocopying or storing in any medium by electronic means or other) without the written permission of 
the copyright holder except in accordance with the provisions of the Copyright, Designs and Patents 
Act 1988. 
Applications for the copyright holder’s written permission to reproduce any part of this publication 
should be addressed to Deep Sea Electronics Plc at the address above. 
The DSE logo is a UK registered trademarks of Deep Sea Electronics PLC. 
Any reference to trademarked product names used within this publication is owned by their respective 
companies. 
Deep Sea Electronics Plc reserves the right to change the contents of this document without prior 
notice. 
Amendments List 
Issue Comments Minimum 
Module version 
required 
Minimum 
Configuration Suite 
Version required 
1 Initial release V4.3.35 2011.10v1.0.7 
Typeface: The typeface used in this document is Arial. Care should be taken not to mistake the upper case letter I with the numeral 1. The 
numeral 1 has a top serif to avoid this confusion. 
Clarification of notation used within this publication. 
NOTE: 
Highlights an essential element of a procedure to ensure correctness. 
CAUTION! 
Indicates a procedure or practice, which, if not strictly observed, could result in 
damage or destruction of equipment. 
WARNING! 
Indicates a procedure or practice, which could result in injury to personnel or loss 
of life if not followed correctly.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
3 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
Section Page 
1 BIBLIOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................7 
1.1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................. 7 
1.2 TRAINING GUIDES ..................................................................................................... 7 
1.3 MANUALS .................................................................................................................. 7 
2 INTRODUCTION ...........................................................................................8 
3 SPECIFICATIONS.........................................................................................9 
3.1 PART NUMBERING .................................................................................................... 9 
3.1.1 SHORT NAMES .................................................................................................... 9 
3.2 TERMINAL SPECIFICATION ..................................................................................... 10 
3.3 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... 10 
3.4 GENERATOR VOLTAGE / FREQUENCY SENSING ................................................... 10 
3.5 GENERATOR CURRENT SENSING........................................................................... 11 
3.5.1 VA RATING OF THE CTS ................................................................................... 11 
3.5.2 CT POLARITY .................................................................................................... 12 
3.5.3 CT PHASING ...................................................................................................... 12 
3.5.4 CT CLASS.......................................................................................................... 12 
3.6 INPUTS .................................................................................................................... 13 
3.6.1 DIGITAL INPUTS ................................................................................................ 13 
3.6.1 ANALOGUE INPUTS ........................................................................................... 13 
3.6.2 CHARGE FAIL INPUT ......................................................................................... 14 
3.6.3 MAGNETIC PICKUP ........................................................................................... 14 
3.7 OUTPUTS ................................................................................................................ 15 
3.7.1 OUTPUTS A & B ................................................................................................. 15 
3.7.2 CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS C & D (LOAD SWITCHING) ...................................... 15 
3.7.1 OUTPUTS E,F,G,H, I ,J & K ................................................................................ 16 
3.8 COMMUNICATION PORTS ....................................................................................... 17 
3.9 COMMUNICATION PORT USAGE ............................................................................ 17 
3.9.1 CAN INTERFACE............................................................................................... 17 
3.9.2 USB CONNECTION ............................................................................................ 18 
3.9.3 USB HOST-MASTER (USB DRIVE CONNECTION) ............................................... 18 
3.9.4 RS232................................................................................................................ 19 
3.9.5 RS485................................................................................................................ 21 
3.9.6 ETHERNET ........................................................................................................ 22 
3.10 DSENET® FOR EXPANSION MODULES............................................................... 28 
3.10.1 DSENET® USED FOR MODBUS ENGINE CONNECTION ..................................... 28 
3.11 SOUNDER............................................................................................................. 29 
3.11.1 ADDING AN EXTERNAL SOUNDER TO THE APPLICATION ................................. 29 
3.12 ACCUMULATED INSTRUMENTATION ................................................................... 29 
3.13 DIMENSIONS AND MOUNTING ............................................................................. 30 
3.13.1 DIMENSIONS ..................................................................................................... 30 
3.13.2 FIXING CLIPS .................................................................................................... 31 
3.13.3 CABLE TIE FIXING POINTS................................................................................ 32 
3.13.4 SILICON SEALING GASKET ............................................................................... 32 
3.14 APPLICABLE STANDARDS ................................................................................... 33 
3.14.1 ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 34 
IP CLASSIFICATIONS .................................................................................................. 34 
3.14.2 NEMA CLASSIFICATIONS .................................................................................. 35 
4 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................... 36
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
4.1 TERMINAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................ 36 
4.1.1 DC SUPPLY, FUEL AND START OUTPUTS, OUTPUTS E-J .................................. 37 
4.1.2 ANALOGUE SENSOR ......................................................................................... 38 
4.1.3 MAGNETIC PICKUP, CAN AND EXPANSION ....................................................... 39 
4.1.4 V1 LOAD SWITCHING AND GENERATOR VOLTAGE SENSING .......................... 40 
4.1.5 V2 MAINS VOLTAGE SENSING ......................................................................... 40 
4.1.6 GENERATOR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ........................................................ 41 
4.1.7 MAINS CURRENT TRANSFORMERS .................................................................. 41 
4.1.8 CONFIGURABLE DIGITAL INPUTS ..................................................................... 43 
4.1.9 PC CONFIGURATION INTERFACE CONNECTOR................................................ 43 
4.1.10 RS485 CONNECTOR .......................................................................................... 44 
4.1.11 RS232 CONNECTOR .......................................................................................... 44 
4.2 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS ................................................................................... 45 
4.2.1 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION .................. 46 
4.3 ALTERNATIVE TOPOLOGIES .................................................................................. 47 
4.3.1 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT PROTECTION ................................. 47 
4.3.2 SINGLE PHASE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT............................................ 48 
4.3.3 SINGLE PHASE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT........................................................... 48 
4.3.4 2 PHASE (L1 & L2) 3 WIRE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT .......................... 49 
4.3.5 2 PHASE (L1 & L2) 3 WIRE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT ......................................... 49 
4.3.6 2 PHASE (L1 & L3) 3 WIRE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT .......................... 50 
4.3.7 2 PHASE (L1 & L3) 3 WIRE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT MEASURING ..................... 50 
4.3.8 3 PHASE 4 WIRE WITH UNRESTRICTED EARTH FAULT MEASURING ................ 51 
4.3.9 EARTH SYSTEMS .............................................................................................. 51 
4.4 TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT OF DSENET® ................................................................. 52 
4.4.1 EARTH SYSTEMS .............................................................................................. 53 
5 DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS .................................................................. 54 
5.1 DSE8620 AUTOMATIC MAINS FAILURE (AMF) CONTROL MODULE ........................ 54 
5.2 VIEWING THE INSTRUMENT PAGES ....................................................................... 56 
5.2.1 STATUS ............................................................................................................. 57 
5.2.2 ENGINE ............................................................................................................. 58 
5.2.3 GENERATOR ..................................................................................................... 59 
5.2.4 MAINS ............................................................................................................... 59 
5.2.1 RS232 SERIAL PORT ......................................................................................... 60 
5.2.1 RS485 SERIAL PORT ......................................................................................... 63 
5.2.2 ABOUT .............................................................................................................. 64 
5.2.1 CAN ERROR MESSAGES................................................................................... 66 
5.3 VIEWING THE EVENT LOG ...................................................................................... 67 
5.4 USER CONFIGURABLE INDICATORS ....................................................................... 68 
6 OPERATION ............................................................................................... 69 
6.1 CONTROL ................................................................................................................ 69 
6.2 CONTROL PUSH-BUTTONS .................................................................................... 70 
6.3 DUMMY LOAD / LOAD SHEDDING CONTROL .......................................................... 72 
6.4 STOP MODE ............................................................................................................ 73 
6.4.1 ECU OVERRIDE ................................................................................................. 74 
6.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ........................................................................................ 75 
6.5.1 MAINS FAILURE................................................................................................. 75 
6.5.1 ENGINE RUNNING.............................................................................................. 76 
6.5.2 REMOTE START IN ISLAND MODE .................................................................... 77 
6.5.3 REMOTE START ON LOAD ................................................................................ 79 
6.6 MANUAL OPERATION .............................................................................................. 81 
6.7 TEST OPERATION ................................................................................................... 83 
7 PROTECTIONS ........................................................................................... 85 
7.1 PROTECTIONS DISABLED ....................................................................................... 86 
7.1.1 INDICATION / WARNING ALARMS...................................................................... 86 
4
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
7.1.2 SHUTDOWN / ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARMS......................................................... 86 
7.1.3 CAN ALARMS .................................................................................................... 87 
7.2 INDICATIONS ........................................................................................................... 88 
7.3 WARNINGS .............................................................................................................. 89 
7.4 HIGH CURRENT WARNING ALARM .......................................................................... 90 
7.5 SHUTDOWNS........................................................................................................... 91 
7.6 ELECTRICAL TRIPS ................................................................................................. 93 
7.7 HIGH CURRENT SHUTDOWN / ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARM ...................................... 94 
7.7.1 IMMEDIATE WARNING ...................................................................................... 94 
7.7.2 IDMT ALARM ..................................................................................................... 94 
7.8 EARTH FAULT SHUTDOWN / ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARM ........................................ 96 
7.9 SHORT CIRCUIT ALARM .......................................................................................... 96 
7.10 ROCOF / VECTOR SHIFT...................................................................................... 97 
7.10.1 MAINS DECOUPLING TEST MODE .................................................................... 97 
8 SCHEDULER .............................................................................................. 98 
8.1.1 STOP MODE...................................................................................................... 98 
8.1.2 MANUAL MODE ................................................................................................. 98 
8.1.3 AUTO MODE...................................................................................................... 98 
9 SYNCHROSCOPE OPERATION.................................................................. 99 
10 COMMISSIONING .................................................................................. 100 
10.1 COMMISSIONING SCREENS ............................................................................... 100 
10.1.1 SCREEN 1 ....................................................................................................... 100 
10.1.2 SCREEN 2 ....................................................................................................... 100 
10.1.3 SCREEN 3 ....................................................................................................... 100 
10.1.4 SCREEN 4 ....................................................................................................... 100 
11 FRONT PANEL CONFIGURATION ........................................................ 101 
11.1 ACCESSING THE MAIN FRONT PANEL CONFIGURATION EDITOR .................... 102 
11.1.1 EDITING A PARAMETER .................................................................................. 103 
11.2 ADJUSTABLE PARAMETERS.............................................................................. 104 
11.3 ACCESSING THE ‘RUNNING’ CONFIGURATION EDITOR .................................... 105 
11.3.1 EDITING A PARAMETER .................................................................................. 105 
11.3.2 ADJUSTABLE PARAMETERS (RUNNING EDITOR) ............................................ 105 
12 FAULT FINDING .................................................................................... 106 
12.1.1 EARTH FAULT TRIPPING CURVES ................................................................... 107 
12.1.2 SHORT CIRCUIT TRIPPING CURVES ............................................................... 108 
12.2 COMMUNICATIONS OPTION .............................................................................. 109 
12.2.1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 109 
12.2.2 CONTROLLER TO PC (DIRECT) CONNECTION ................................................ 109 
12.2.3 MODBUS ......................................................................................................... 110 
12.3 IEEE C37.2 STANDARD ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM FUNCTION NUMBERS.. 110 
13 COMMISSIONING .................................................................................. 113 
13.1.1 PRE-COMMISSIONING .................................................................................... 113 
14 FAULT FINDING .................................................................................... 115 
15 DSE 4 STEPS TO SUCCESSFUL SYNCHRONISING ............................. 117 
15.1 CONTROL .......................................................................................................... 117 
15.2 METERING ......................................................................................................... 117 
15.3 COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................................................ 117 
15.4 SYNC CHECKS ................................................................................................... 117 
16 MAINTENANCE, SPARES, REPAIR AND SERVICING .......................... 118 
16.1 PURCHASING ADDITIONAL CONNECTOR PLUGS FROM DSE ........................... 118 
5
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
16.2 PURCHASING ADDITIONAL FIXING CLIPS FROM DSE........................................ 118 
16.3 PURCHASING ADDITIONAL SEALING GASKET FROM DSE ................................ 118 
16.4 DSENET EXPANSION MODULES ........................................................................ 119 
16.5 ETHERNET (LAN) CONNECTION ........................................................................ 119 
17 WARRANTY ........................................................................................... 120 
18 DISPOSAL ............................................................................................. 120 
18.1 WEEE (WASTE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT) .......................... 120 
18.2 ROHS (RESTRICTION OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES) ..................................... 120 
6
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
7 
1 BIBLIOGRAPHY 
This document refers to and is referred to by the following DSE publications which can be obtained 
from the DSE website www.deepseaplc.com 
1.1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 
Installation instructions are supplied with the product in the box and are intended as a ‘quick start’ guide 
only. 
DSE PART DESCRIPTION 
053-129 DSE8620 Installation Instructions 
053-032 DSE2548 LED Expansion Annunciator Installation Instructions 
053-033 DSE2130 Input Expansion Installation Instructions 
053-034 DSE2157 Output Expansion Installation Instructions 
1.2 TRAINING GUIDES 
Training Guides are produced to give ‘handout’ sheets on specific subjects during training sessions 
DSE PART DESCRIPTION 
056-005 Using CTs With DSE Products 
056-010 Overcurrent Protection 
056-018 Negative Phase Sequence 
056-019 Earth Fault Protection 
056-020 Loss of Excitation 
056-021 Mains Decoupling (G59) 
056-022 Breaker Control 
056-024 GSM Modem 
056-026 kW & kVAr 
056-029 Smoke Limiting 
056-030 Module PIN Codes 
056-057 SW1 & SW2 
1.3 MANUALS 
DSE PART DESCRIPTION 
057-004 Electronic Engines and DSE wiring 
057-045 DSE Guide to Synchronising and Load Sharing Part1 
057-046 DSE Guide to Synchronising and Load Sharing Part2 
057-047 DSE Load Share Design and Commissioning Guide 
057-119 DSE8600 Series Configuration Software Manual 
057-082 DSE2130 Input Expansion Manual 
057-083 DSE2157 Output Expansion Manual 
057-084 DSE2548 Annunciator Expansion Manual 
Additionally this document refers to the following third party publications 
REFERENCE DESCRIPTION 
ISBN 1-55937-879-4 IEEE Std C37.2-1996 IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers 
and Contact Designations. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc 
ISBN 0-7506-1147-2 Diesel generator handbook. L.L.J.Mahon 
ISBN 0-9625949-3-8 On-Site Power Generation. EGSA Education Committee.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
8 
2 INTRODUCTION 
This document details the installation and operation requirements of the DSE8600 Series modules, part 
of the DSEGenset® range of products. 
The manual forms part of the product and should be kept for the entire life of the product. If the 
product is passed or supplied to another party, ensure that this document is passed to them for 
reference purposes. 
This is not a controlled document. You will not be automatically informed of updates. Any future 
updates of this document will be included on the DSE website at www.deepseaplc.com 
The DSE8620 module has been designed to allow the operator to start and stop the generator, and if 
required, transfer the load to the generator either manually (via fascia mounted push-buttons) or 
automatically. Utilising the inbuilt synchronising, volts matching and paralleling functions, the controller is 
able to parallel with the mains supply for soft transfer of peak lopping. Synchronsing and Load Sharing 
features are included within the controller, along with the necessary protections for such a system. 
The DSE8620 has mains failure detection to enable the transfer of load to a generator and return back 
upon restoration of the mains with added features to avoid transients of the supply. 
The user also has the facility to view the system operating parameters via the LCD display. 
The DSE8620 module monitors the engine, indicating the operational status and fault conditions, 
automatically shutting down the engine and giving a true first up fault condition of an engine failure by a 
COMMON AUDIBLE ALARM. The LCD display indicates the fault. 
The powerful ARM microprocessor contained within the module allows for incorporation of a range of 
complex features: 
· Text based LCD display (supporting multiple languages). 
· True RMS Voltage, Current and Power monitoring. 
· Communications capability (RS485, RS232 or Ethernet) 
· Engine parameter monitoring. 
· Automatic sync capability 
· Load control capability 
· Fully configurable inputs for use as alarms or a range of different functions. 
· Engine ECU interface to electronic engines. 
· Direct connection to governor / AVR for synchronising and load sharing 
· R.O.C.O.F. and Vector shift for detection of mains failure when in parallel with the mains supply. 
Using a PC and the DSE Configuration Suite software allows alteration of selected operational 
sequences, timers and alarms. Additionally, the module’s integral fascia configuration editor allows 
adjustment of a subset of this information. 
A robust plastic case designed for front panel mounting houses the module. Connections are via locking 
plug and sockets. 
Selective operational sequences, timers and alarm trips can be altered by the customer via a PC using 
the DSE Configuration suite or via the integral front panel configuration editor. 
Access to critical operational sequences and timers for use by qualified engineers, can be protected by 
a security code. Module access can also be protected by PIN code. Selected parameters can be 
changed from the module’s front panel. 
The module is housed in a robust plastic case suitable for panel mounting. Connections to the module 
are via locking plug and sockets.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
9 
3 SPECIFICATIONS 
3.1 PART NUMBERING 
8620 - 002 - 01 
Product type 
DSE 8620 AMF 
Automatic Mains 
Failure 
Controller and 
ATS Module 
8620 
Variant 
Standard version 01 
Hardware revision 
Initial Release 002 
At the time of this document production, there have been no revisions to the module hardware. 
3.1.1 SHORT NAMES 
Short name Description 
DSE8000, All modules in the DSE8000 Series 
DSE8600,DSE86xx All modules in the DSE8600 sync/load share range 
DSE8620 DSE8620 module
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
10 
3.2 TERMINAL SPECIFICATION 
Connection type Two part connector. 
· Male part fitted to module 
· Female part supplied in 
module packing case - Screw 
terminal, rising clamp, no 
internal spring. Example showing cable entry and screw 
terminals of Minimum cable size 0.5mm² (AWG 24) a 10 way connector 
Maximum cable size 2.5mm² (AWG 10) 
NOTE: For purchasing additional connector plugs from DSE, please see the section entitled 
Maintenance, Spares, Repair and Servicing elsewhere in this document. 
3.3 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS 
Minimum supply voltage 8V continuous 
Cranking dropouts 
Able to survive 0V for 50mS providing the supply was at least 10V before the 
dropout and recovers to 5V afterwards. 
Maximum supply voltage 35V continuous (60V protection) 
Reverse polarity protection -35V continuous 
Maximum operating current 
300mA at 24V 
600mA at 12V 
Maximum standby current 
190mA at 24V 
390mA at 12V 
Plant supply instrumentation display 
Range 0V-70V DC (note Maximum continuous operating voltage of 35V DC) 
Resolution 0.1V 
Accuracy 1% full scale (±0.7V) 
3.4 GENERATOR VOLTAGE / FREQUENCY SENSING 
Measurement type True RMS conversion 
Sample Rate 5KHz or better 
Harmonics Up to 10th or better 
Input Impedance 300K W ph-N 
Phase to Neutral 15V (minimum required for sensing frequency) to 333V AC (absolute maximum) 
Suitable for 110V to 277V nominal (±20% for under/overvoltage detection) 
Phase to Phase 26V (minimum required for sensing frequency) to 576V AC (absolute maximum) 
Suitable for 190V ph-ph to 479V ph-ph nominal (±20% for under/overvoltage detection) 
Common mode offset from Earth 100V AC (max) 
Resolution 1V AC phase to neutral 
2V AC phase to phase 
Accuracy ±1% of full scale phase to neutral 
±2% of full scale phase to phase 
Minimum frequency 3.5Hz 
Maximum frequency 75.0Hz 
Frequency resolution 0.1Hz 
Frequency accuracy ±0.2Hz
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
3.5 GENERATOR CURRENT SENSING 
Measurement type True RMS conversion 
Sample Rate 5KHz or better 
Harmonics Up to 10th or better 
Nominal CT secondary rating 1A or 5A (5A recommended) 
Maximum continuous current 5A 
Overload Measurement 3 x Nominal Range setting 
Absolute maximum overload 50A for 1 second 
Burden 0.5VA (0.02W current shunts) 
common mode offset ±2V peak plant ground to CT common terminal 
Resolution 0.5% of 5A 
Accuracy ±1% of Nominal (1A or 5A) (excluding CT error) 
3.5.1 VA RATING OF THE CTS 
The VA burden of the DSE8620 module on the CTs is 0.5VA. However depending upon the type and 
length of cabling between the CTs and the DSE8620 module, CTs with a greater VA rating than the 
module are required. 
11 
The distance between the CTs and the 
measuring module should be estimated 
and cross-referenced against the chart 
opposite to find the VA burden of the 
cable itself. 
If the CTs are fitted within the 
alternator top box, the star point 
(common) of the CTs should be 
connected to system ground (earth) as 
close as possible to the CTs. This 
minimises the length of cable used to 
connect the CTs to the DSE module. 
Example. 
If 1.5mm² cable is used and the 
distance from the CT to the measuring 
module is 20m, then the burden of the 
cable alone is approximately 15VA. As 
the burden of the DSE controller is 
0.5VA, then a CT with a rating of at 
least 15+0.5V = 15.5VA must be used. 
If 2.5mm² cables are used over the 
same distance of 20m, then the burden 
of the cable on the CT is approximately 
7VA. CT’s required in this instance is at 
least 7.5VA (7+0.5). 
NOTE: - Details for 4mm² cables are shown for reference only. The connectors on the DSE modules are 
only suitable for cables up to 2.5mm². 
NOTE: - CTs with 5A secondary windings are recommended with DSE modules. 1A CTs can be used if 
necessary however, the resolution of the readings is 5 times better when using 5A CTs.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
12 
3.5.2 CT POLARITY 
Take care to ensure the correct polarity of the CTs. Incorrect CT orientation will lead to negative kW 
readings when the set is supplying power. Take note that paper stick-on labels on CTs that show the 
orientation are often incorrectly placed on the CT (!). It is more reliable to use the labelling in the case 
moulding as an indicator to orientation (if available). 
To test orientation, run the generator in island mode (not in parallel with any other supply) and load the 
generator to around 10% of the set rating. Ensure the DSE module shows positive kW for all three 
individual phase readings. 
labelled as p1, 
k or K 
labelled as p2, 
l or L 
TO GENERATOR TO LOAD SWITCH DEVICE 
POLARITY OF CT PRIMARY 
NOTE:- Take care to ensure correct polarity of the CT primary as shown above. If in 
doubt, check with the CT supplier. 
3.5.3 CT PHASING 
Take particular care that the CTs are connected to the correct phases. For instance, ensure that the 
CT on phase 1 is connected to the terminal on the DSE module intended for connection to the CT for 
phase 1. 
Additionally ensure that the voltage sensing for phase 1 is actually connected to generator phase 1. 
Incorrect connection of the phases as described above will result in incorrect power factor (pf) 
measurements, which in turn results in incorrect kW measurements. 
One way to check for this is to make use of a single-phase load. Place the load on each phase in turn, 
run the generator and ensure the kW value appears in the correct phase. For instance if the load is 
connected to phase 3, ensure the kW figure appears in phase 3 display and not in the display for 
phase 1 or 2. 
3.5.4 CT CLASS 
Ensure the correct CT type is chosen. For instance if the DSE module is providing overcurrent 
protection, ensure the CT is capable of measuring the overload level you wish to protect against, and 
at the accuracy level you require. 
For instance, this may mean fitting a protection class CT (P10 type) to maintain high accuracy while the 
CT is measuring overload currents. 
Conversely, if the DSE module is using the CT for instrumentation only (current protection is disabled or 
not fitted to the controller), then measurement class CTs can be used. Again, bear in mind the 
accuracy you require. The DSE module is accurate to better than 1% of the full-scale current reading. 
To maintain this accuracy you should fit Class 0.5 or Class 1 CTs. 
You should check with your CT manufacturer for further advice on selecting your CTs
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
13 
3.6 INPUTS 
3.6.1 DIGITAL INPUTS 
Number 11 configurable inputs 
Arrangement Contact between terminal and ground 
Low level threshold 2.1V minimum 
High level threshold 6.6V maximum 
Maximum input voltage +50V DC with respect to plant supply negative 
Minimum input voltage -24V DC with respect to plant supply negative 
Contact wetting current 7mA typical 
Open circuit voltage 12V typical 
3.6.1 ANALOGUE INPUTS 
Oil Pressure (Configurable if engine ECU link provides oil pressure measurement) 
Measurement type Resistance measurement by measuring voltage across sensor with a fixed 
current applied 
Arrangement Differential resistance measurement input 
Measurement current 15mA 
Full scale 240W 
Over range / fail 270W 
Resolution 0.1 Bar (1-2 PSI) 
Accuracy ±2% of full scale resistance (±4.8W) excluding transducer error 
Max common mode voltage ±2V 
Display range 13.7 bar (0-200 PSI) subject to limits of the sensor 
Coolant Temperature (Configurable if engine ECU link provides coolant temp measurement) 
Measurement type Resistance measurement by measuring voltage across sensor with a fixed current applied 
Arrangement Differential resistance measurement input 
Measurement current 10mA 
Full scale 480W 
Over range / fail 540W 
Resolution 1°C (2°F) 
Accuracy +/-2% of full scale resistance (±9.6W) excluding transducer error 
Max common mode 
±2V 
voltage 
Display range 0°C -140°C (32°F - 284°F) subject to limits of the sensor 
Fuel Level 
Measurement type Resistance measurement by measuring voltage across sensor with a fixed current applied 
Arrangement Differential resistance measurement input 
Measurement current 10mA 
Full scale 480W 
Over range / fail 540W 
Resolution 1°C (2°F) 
Accuracy +/-2% of full scale resistance (±9.6W) excluding transducer error 
Max common mode 
±2V 
voltage 
Display range 0-250%
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
14 
Flexible sensor 
Number 2 
Measurement type Resistance measurement by measuring voltage across sensor with a fixed current 
applied 
Arrangement Differential resistance measurement input 
Measurement current 10mA 
Full scale 480W 
Over range / fail 540W 
Resolution 1% 
Accuracy ±2% of full scale resistance (±9.6W) excluding transducer error 
Max common mode voltage ±2V 
Display range 0-250% 
3.6.2 CHARGE FAIL INPUT 
Minimum voltage 0V 
Maximum voltage 35V (plant supply) 
Resolution 0.2V 
Accuracy ± 1% of max measured voltage 
Excitation Active circuit constant power output 
Output Power 2.5W Nominal @12V and 24V 
Current at 12V 210mA 
Current at 24V 105mA 
The charge fail input is actually a combined input and output. Whenever the generator is required to 
run, the terminal provides excitation current to the charge alternator field winding. 
When the charge alternator is correctly charging the battery, the voltage of the terminal is close to the 
plant battery supply voltage. In a failed charge situation, the voltage of this terminal is pulled down to a 
low voltage. It is this drop in voltage that triggers the charge failure alarm. The level at which this 
operates and whether this triggers a warning or shutdown alarm is configurable using the DSE Config 
Suite Software. 
3.6.3 MAGNETIC PICKUP 
Type Single ended input, capacitive coupled 
Minimum voltage 0.5V RMS 
Max common mode voltage ±2V 
Maximum voltage Clamped to ±70V by transient suppressers, dissipation not to exceed 1W. 
Maximum frequency 10,000Hz 
Resolution 6.25 RPM 
Accuracy ±25 RPM 
Flywheel teeth 10 to 500 
NOTE : DSE can supply a suitable magnetic pickup device, available in two body thread 
lengths : 
DSE Part number 020-012 - Magnetic Pickup probe 5/8 UNF 2½” thread length 
DSE Part number 020-013 - Magnetic Pickup probe 5/8 UNF 4” thread length 
Magnetic Pickup devices can often be ‘shared’ between two or more devices. For example, one device 
can often supply the signal to both the DSE8600 series module and the engine governor. The possibility 
of this depends upon the amount of current that the magnetic pickup can supply.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
DSE output drives the contactor coil, via external slave relay if required. 
When the DSE module requires the contactor closed, the output energises (closing the internal 
relay) 
When the DSE module requires the contactor to be open, the output is de-energised (opening 
the internal relay) 
15 
3.7 OUTPUTS 
Ten (10) digital outputs are fitted to the DSE8620 controller. Additional outputs are provided for by 
adding up to ten (10) external relay boards (DSE2157). This allows for up to 80 additional digital 
outputs. 
3.7.1 OUTPUTS A & B 
Type Normally used for Fuel / Start outputs. Fully configurable for other purposes if the module is 
configured to control an electronic engine. Supplied from Emergency Stop terminal 3. 
Rating 15A resistive @ 35V 
3.7.2 CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS C & D (LOAD SWITCHING) 
Type Fully configurable volts free relays. Output C – Normally Closed, Output D – 
Normally Open 
Rating 8A resistive@ 250V AC 
Protection Protected against over current & over temperature. Built in load dump feature. 
Contactor coils 
Use output D, the normally open relay: 
Generator 
Undervoltage (UV coils) 
Use output C, the normally closed relay : 
Generator 
DSE output drives the UV coil, via external slave relay if required. 
When the generator starts, the UV is powered via the normally closed relay. The breaker is now 
ready for the close signal to be given. When the breaker is to be opened, the Open Generator 
Pulse relay is operated, removing power from the UV coil for one second. This causes the 
breaker to trip (open) as the UV is no longer powered. The Open Generator Pulse relay 
switches back to its closed state, ready to power the UV coil the next time the generator starts.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
When the DSE module requires the breaker closed, the output energises (closing the internal relay) 
for the period of the Breaker Close Pulse timer after which the output is de-energised (opening the 
internal relay). 
When the DSE module requires the breaker open, the output energises (closing the internal relay). 
When the DSE module requires the breaker open, the output energises (closing the internal relay) for 
the period of the breaker trip pulse. 
16 
Closing coils 
For continuous closing signals (close signal is present continuously when the breaker is closed), 
follow the instructions above as for Contactor Coils. 
For momentary (pulsed) closing signals, use OUTPUT D, the normally open relay: 
Generator 
Opening coils / Shunt Trip coils 
For Continuous opening signal, use output D, the normally open relay: 
Generator: 
For momentary (pulsed) closing signals, use a normally open relay: 
Generator: 
3.7.1 OUTPUTS E,F,G,H, I ,J & K 
Number 7 
Type Fully configurable, supplied from DC supply terminal 2. 
Rating 3A resistive @ 35V
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
17 
3.8 COMMUNICATION PORTS 
USB Port USB2.0 Device for connection to PC running DSE configuration 
suite only 
Max distance 6m (yards) 
Serial Communication RS232 and RS485 are both fitted but and provide independent 
operation 
RS232 Serial port Non – Isolated port 
Max Baud rate 115K baud subject to S/W 
TX, RX, RTS, CTS, DSR, DTR, DCD 
Male 9 way D type connector 
Max distance 15m (50 feet) 
RS485 Serial port Isolated 
Data connection 2 wire + common 
Half Duplex 
Data direction control for Transmit (by s/w protocol) 
Max Baud Rate 19200 
External termination required (120W) 
Max common mode offset 70V (on board protection transorb) 
Max distance 1.2km (¾ mile) 
CAN Port Engine CAN Port 
Standard implementation of ‘Slow mode’, up to 250K bits/s 
Non-Isolated. 
Internal Termination provided (120W) 
Max distance 40m (133 feet) 
Ethernet Auto detecting 10/100 Ethernet port. 
3.9 COMMUNICATION PORT USAGE 
3.9.1 CAN INTERFACE 
Modules are fitted with the CAN interface as standard and are capable of 
receiving engine data from engine CAN controllers compliant with the CAN 
standard. 
CAN enabled engine controllers monitor the engine’s operating 
parameters such as engine speed, oil pressure, engine temperature 
(among others) in order to closely monitor and control the engine. The industry standard 
communications interface (CAN) transports data gathered by the engine controller interface. This 
allows generator controllers such as the DSE8600 series to access these engine parameters with no 
physical connection to the sensor device. 
NOTE:- For further details for connections to CAN enabled engines and the functions 
available with each engine type, refer to the manual Electronic Engines and DSE Wiring. 
Part No. 057-004
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
18 
3.9.2 USB CONNECTION 
The USB port is provided to give a simple means of connection between a PC and the DSE8600 series 
controller. 
Using the DSE Configuration Suite Software, the operator is then able to control the module, starting or 
stopping the generator, selecting operating modes, etc. 
Additionally, the various operating parameters (such as output volts, oil pressure, etc.) of the remote 
generator are available to be viewed or changed. 
To connect a DSE8600 series module to a PC by USB, the following items are required: 
· DSE8600 series module 
· DSE 8600 series configuration software 
(Supplied on configuration suite software CD or available from 
www.deepseaplc.com). 
· USB cable Type A to Type B. 
(This is the same cable as often used between a PC and a USB 
printer) 
DSE can supply this cable if required : 
PC Configuration interface lead (USB type A – type B) DSE Part No 
016-125 
NOTE:- The DC supply must be connected to the module for configuration by PC. 
NOTE:- Refer to DSE8600 series Configuration Suite Manual (DSE part 057-119) for further 
details on configuring, monitoring and control. 
3.9.3 USB HOST-MASTER (USB DRIVE CONNECTION) 
Capability to add USB Host facility for USB ‘Pen drive’ type interface for data recording 
Connector Type A. 
For data logging max maximum size 16Gb.(see viewing the instrument pages) 
NOTE:- Refer to DSE8600 series Configuration Suite Manual (DSE part 057-119) for further 
details on configuring, monitoring and control.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
19 
3.9.4 RS232 
The RS232 port on the DSE8600 series controller supports the Modbus RTU protocol. 
The Gencomm register table for the controller is available upon request from the DSE Technical 
Support Department. 
RS232 is for short distance communication (max 15m) and is typically used to connect the DSE86xx 
series controller to a telephone or GSM modem for more remote communications. 
Many PCs are not fitted with an internal RS232 serial port. DSE DOES NOT recommend the use of 
USB to RS232 convertors but can recommend PC add-ons to provide the computer with an RS232 
port. 
Recommended PC Serial Port add-ons (for computers without internal RS232 port): 
Remember to check these parts are suitable for your PC. Consult your PC supplier for further advice. 
· Brainboxes PM143 PCMCIA RS232 card (for laptop PCs) 
· Brainboxes VX-001 Express Card RS232 (for laptops and nettops PCs) 
· Brainboxes UC246 PCI RS232 card (for desktop PCs) 
· Brainboxes PX-246 PCI Express 1 Port RS232 1 x 9 Pin (for desktop 
PCs) 
Supplier: 
Brainboxes 
Tel: +44 (0)151 220 2500 
Web: http://www.brainboxes.com 
Email: Sales:sales@brainboxes.com 
NB DSE Have no business tie to Brainboxes. Over many years, our own engineers have used these 
products and are happy to recommend them.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
20 
RECOMMENDED EXTERNAL MODEMS: 
· Multitech Global Modem – MultiModem ZBA (PSTN) 
DSE Part Number 020-252 
(Contact DSE Sales for details of localisation kits for these modems) 
· Wavecom Fastrak Supreme GSM modem kit (PSU, Antenna and modem)* 
DSE Part number 0830-001-01 
· Brodersen GSM Industrial Modem* 
DSE Part number 020-245 
NOTE: *For GSM modems a SIM card is required, supplied by your GSM network provider : 
· For SMS only, a ‘normal’ voice SIM card is required. This enables the controller to send SMS 
messages to designated mobile phones upon status and alarm conditions. 
· For a data connection to a PC running DSE Configuration Suite Software, a ‘special’ CSD 
(Circuit Switched Data) SIM card is required that will enable the modem to answer an incoming 
data call. Many ‘pay as you go’ services will not provide a CSD (Circuit Switched Data) SIM 
card.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
21 
3.9.5 RS485 
The RS485 port on the DSE8600 series controller supports the Modbus RTU protocol. 
The DSE Gencomm register table for the controller is available upon request from the DSE Technical 
Support Department. 
RS485 is used for point-to-point cable connection of more than one device (maximum 32 devices) and 
allows for connection to PCs, PLCs and Building Management Systems (to name just a few devices). 
One advantage of the RS485 interface is the large distance specification (1.2km when using Belden 
9841 (or equivalent) cable. This allows for a large distance between the DSE8600 series module and a 
PC running the DSE Configuration Suite software. The operator is then able to control the module, 
starting or stopping the generator, selecting operating modes, etc. 
The various operating parameters (such as output volts, oil pressure, etc.) of the remote generator can 
be viewed or changed. 
NOTE:- For a single module to PC connection and distances up to 6m (8yds) the USB 
connection method is more suitable and provides for a lower cost alternative to RS485 (which 
is more suited to longer distance connections). 
Recommended PC Serial Port add-ons (for computers without internal RS485 port). 
Remember to check these parts are suitable for your PC. Consult your PC supplier for further advice. 
· Brainboxes PM154 PCMCIA RS485 card (for laptops PCs) 
Set to ‘Half Duplex, Autogating” with ‘CTS True’ set to ‘enabled’ 
· Brainboxes VX-023 ExpressCard 1 Port RS422/485 (for laptops and 
nettop PCs) 
· Brainboxes UC320 PCI Velocity RS485 card (for desktop PCs) 
Set to ‘Half Duplex, Autogating” with ‘CTS True’ set to ‘enabled’ 
· Brainboxes PX-324 PCI Express 1 Port RS422/485 (for desktop PCs) 
Supplier: 
Brainboxes 
Tel: +44 (0)151 220 2500 
Web: http://www.brainboxes.com 
Email: Sales:sales@brainboxes.com 
NB DSE have no business tie to Brainboxes. Over many years,our own engineers have used these 
products and are happy to recommend them.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
22 
3.9.6 ETHERNET 
The DSE8620 is fitted with ETHERNET socket for connection to LAN (local area networks) 
Description 
1 TX+ 
2 TX- 
3 RX+ 
4 Do not connect 
5 Do not connect 
6 RX- 
7 Do not connect 
8 Do not connect 
3.9.6.1 DIRECT PC CONNECTION 
Requirements 
· DSE8620 
· Crossover Ethernet cable (see Below) 
· PC with Ethernet port and Windows Internet Explorer 6 or above, Firefox 
Crossover 
network cable
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
23 
Crossover cable wiring detail 
Two pairs crossed, two pairs uncrossed 
10baseT/100baseTX crossover 
Pin Connection 1 (T568A) Connection 2 (T568B) 
1 white/green stripe white/orange stripe 
2 green solid orange solid 
3 white/orange stripe white/green stripe 
4 blue solid blue solid 
5 white/blue stripe white/blue stripe 
6 orange solid green solid 
7 white/brown stripe white/brown stripe 
8 brown solid brown solid 
NOTE:- This cable can be purchased from any good PC or IT store. 
3.9.6.2 CONNECTION TO BASIC ETHERNET 
Requirements 
For the advanced 
Engineer, a 
crossover cable is a 
CAT5 cable with one 
end terminated as 
T568A and the other 
end terminated as 
T568B. 
· DSE8620 
· Ethernet cable (see below) 
· Working Ethernet (company or home network) 
· PC with Ethernet port and Windows Internet Explorer 6 or above, Firefox 
Ethernet router 
or ADSL router 
Ethernet cable
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
Ethernet cable wiring detail 
. 
10baseT/100baseT 
Pin Connection 1 (T568A) Connection 2 (T568A) 
1 white/green stripe white/green stripe 
2 green solid green solid 
3 white/orange stripe white/orange stripe 
4 blue solid blue solid 
5 white/blue stripe white/blue stripe 
6 orange solid orange solid 
7 white/brown stripe white/brown stripe 
8 brown solid brown solid 
For the advanced 
Engineer, this cable 
has both ends 
terminated as T568A 
(as shown below) or 
T568B. 
NOTE:- DSE Stock a 2m (2yds) Ethernet Cable – Part number 016-137. Alternatively they 
can be purchased from any good PC or IT store. 
3.9.6.3 CONNECTION TO COMPANY INFRASTRUCTURE ETHERNET 
24 
Requirements 
· DSE8620 
· Ethernet cable (see below) 
· Working Ethernet (company or home network) 
· PC with Ethernet port and Windows Internet Explorer 6 or above, Firefox 
Ethernet cable 
PC Network 
wall connection 
sockets 
Ethernet router 
or ADSL router
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
Ethernet cable wiring detail 
10baseT/100baseT 
Pin Connection 1 (T568A) Connection 2 (T568A) 
1 white/green stripe white/green stripe 
2 green solid green solid 
3 white/orange stripe white/orange stripe 
4 blue solid blue solid 
5 white/blue stripe white/blue stripe 
6 orange solid orange solid 
7 white/brown stripe white/brown stripe 
8 brown solid brown solid 
NOTE:- DSE Stock a 2m (2yds) Ethernet Cable – Part number 016-137. Alternatively they 
can be purchased from any good PC or IT store. 
25 
3.9.6.4 CONNECTION TO THE INTERNET 
Requirements 
· Ethernet cable (see below) 
· Working Ethernet (company or home network) 
· Working Internet connection (ADSL or DSL recommended) 
For the advanced 
Engineer, this cable 
has both ends 
terminated as T568A 
(as shown below) or 
T568B. 
Ethernet cable 
DSL or ADSL 
router 
Optional ‘Local’ 
site PC 
INTERNET 
DSL or ADSL 
router 
PC remote 
from generator 
site 
The 
DSL/ADSL 
router will 
route 
external 
network 
traffic.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
26 
Ethernet cable wiring detail 
10baseT/100baseT 
Pin Connection 1 (T568A) Connection 2 (T568A) 
1 white/green stripe white/green stripe 
2 green solid green solid 
3 white/orange stripe white/orange stripe 
4 blue solid blue solid 
5 white/blue stripe white/blue stripe 
6 orange solid orange solid 
7 white/brown stripe white/brown stripe 
8 brown solid brown solid 
NOTE:- DSE Stock a 2m (2yds) Ethernet Cable – Part number 016-137. Alternatively they 
can be purchased from any good PC or IT store. 
For the advanced 
Engineer, this cable 
has both ends 
terminated as T568A 
(as shown below) or 
T568B.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
27 
Firewall configuration for internet access 
As modem/routers differ enormously in their configuration, it is not possible for DSE to give a complete 
guide to their use with the DSE8620. However it is possible to give a description of the requirements in 
generic terms. For details of how to achieve the connection to your modem/router you are referred to 
the supplier of your modem/router equipment. 
The DSE8620 makes its data available over Modbus TCP and as such communicates over the 
Ethernet using a Port configured via the DSE config suite software.. 
You must configure your modem/router to allow inbound traffic on this port. For more information you 
are referred to your WAN interface device (modem/router) manufacturer. 
It is also important to note that if the port assigned (setting from software “Modbus Port Number”) is 
already in use on the LAN, the DSE8620 cannot be used and another port must be used . 
Outgoing Firewall rule 
As the DSE8620 makes its user interface available to standard web browsers, all communication uses 
the chosen port. It is usual for a firewall to make the same port outgoing open for communication. 
Incoming traffic (virtual server) 
Network Address and Port Translation (NAPT) allows a single device, such as the modem/router 
gateway, to act as an agent between the Internet (or "public external network") and a local (or "internal 
private") network. This means that only a single, unique IP address is required to represent an entire 
group of computers. 
For our DSE8620 application, this means that the WAN IP address of the modem/router is the IP 
address we need to access the site from an external (internet) location. 
When requests reaches the modem/router, we want this passed to a ‘virtual server’ for handling, in our 
case this is the DSE8620 module. 
Result : Traffic arriving from the WAN (internet) on port xxx is automatically sent to IP address set 
within the configuration software on the LAN (DSE8620) for handling. 
NOTE:- Refer to DSE8600 series Configuration Suite Manual (DSE part 057-119) for further 
details on configuring, monitoring and control.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
3.10 DSENET® FOR EXPANSION MODULES 
DSENet® is the interconnection cable between the host controller and the expansion module(s) and 
must not be connect to any device other than DSE equipment designed for connection to the DSENet® 
Cable type Two core screened twisted pair 
Cable characteristic impedance 120W 
Recommended cable Belden 9841 
28 
Belden 9271 
Maximum cable length 1200m (¾ mile) when using Belden 9841 or direct equivalent. 
600m (666 yds) when using Belden 9271 or direct equivalent. 
DSENet® topology “Daisy Chain” Bus with no stubs (spurs) 
DSENet® termination 120W. Fitted internally to host controller. Must be fitted externally to the 
‘last’ expansion module by the customer. 
Maximum expansion modules Total 20 devices made up of DSE2130 (up to 4), DSE2157 (up to 10), 
DSE2548 (up to 10) 
This gives the possibility of : 
Maximum 80 additional relay outputs 
Maximum 80 additional LED indicators 
Maximum 32 additional inputs (16 of which can be analogue inputs if 
required) 
NOTE: As a termination resistor is internally fitted to the host controller, the host 
controller must be the ‘first’ unit on the DSENet®. A termination resistor MUST be fitted to the 
‘last’ unit on the DSENet®. For connection details, you are referred to the section entitled 
‘typical wiring diagram’ elsewhere in this document. 
NOTE : DSE8600 series does not support the 2510/2520 display modules. 
3.10.1 DSENET® USED FOR MODBUS ENGINE CONNECTION 
As DSENet® utilises an RS485 hardware interface, this port can be configured for connection to 
Cummins Modbus engines (Engines fitted with Cummins GCS). 
This leaves the RS485 interface free for connection to remote monitoring equipment (i.e. Building 
Management System, PLC or PC RS485 port). 
While this is a very useful feature in some applications, the obvious drawback is that the DSENet® 
interface is no longer available for connection to expansion devices. 
Example of configuring the DSENet® for connection to Cummins QST GCS using the DSE 
Configuration Suite Software:
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
29 
3.11 SOUNDER 
DSE8600 Series features an internal sounder to draw attention to warning, shutdown and electrical trip 
alarms. 
Sounder level 64db @ 1m 
3.11.1 ADDING AN EXTERNAL SOUNDER TO THE APPLICATION 
Should an external alarm or indicator be required, this can be achieved by using the DSE Configuration 
Suite PC software to configure an auxiliary output for “Audible Alarm”, and by configuring an auxiliary 
input for “Alarm Mute” (if required). 
The audible alarm output activates and de-activates at the same time as the module’s internal sounder. 
The Alarm mute input and internal alarm mute button activate ‘in parallel’ with each other. Either signal 
will mute both the internal sounder and audible alarm output. 
Example of configuration to achieve external sounder with external alarm mute button: 
3.12 ACCUMULATED INSTRUMENTATION 
NOTE: When an accumulated instrumentation value exceeds the maximum number as 
listed below, it will reset and begin counting from zero again. 
Engine hours run Maximum 99999 hrs 59 minutes (approximately 11yrs 4months) 
Number of starts 1,000,000 (1 million) 
The number of logged Engine Hours and Number of Starts can be set/reset using the DSE 
Configuration Suite PC software. Depending upon module configuration, this may have been PIN 
number locked by your generator supplier
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
30 
3.13 DIMENSIONS AND MOUNTING 
3.13.1 DIMENSIONS 
240.0mm x 181.1mm x 41.7mm (9.4” x 7.1” x 1.6”) 
PANEL CUTOUT 
220mm x 160mm (8.7” x 6.3”) 
WEIGHT 
0.7kg (1.4lb)
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
31 
3.13.2 FIXING CLIPS 
The module is held into the panel fascia using the supplied fixing clips. 
· Withdraw the fixing clip screw (turn anticlockwise) until only the pointed end is protruding from 
the clip. 
· Insert the three ‘prongs’ of the fixing clip into the slots in the side of the 8000 series module 
case. 
· Pull the fixing clip backwards (towards the back of the module) ensuring all three prongs of the 
clip are inside their allotted slots. 
· Turn the fixing clip screws clockwise until they make contact with the panel fascia. 
· Turn the screws a little more to secure the module into the panel fascia. Care should be taken 
not to over tighten the fixing clip screws. 
Fixing clip 
NOTE:- In conditions of excessive vibration, mount the module on suitable anti-vibration 
mountings. 
Fixing clip fitted to 
module
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
32 
3.13.3 CABLE TIE FIXING POINTS 
Integral cable tie fixing points are included on the rear of the module’s case to aid wiring. This 
additionally provides strain relief to the cable loom by removing the weight of the loom from the screw 
connectors, thus reducing the chance of future connection failures. 
Care should be taken not to over tighten the cable tie (for instance with cable tie tools) to prevent the 
risk of damage to the module case. 
Cable tie fixing point With cable and tie in place 
3.13.4 SILICON SEALING GASKET 
The supplied silicon gasket provides improved sealing between the 8000 series module and the panel 
fascia. 
The gasket is fitted to the module before installation into the panel fascia. 
Take care to ensure the gasket is correctly fitted to the module to maintain the integrity of the seal. 
Sealing gasket 
Gasket fitted to 
module
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
33 
3.14 APPLICABLE STANDARDS 
BS 4884-1 This document conforms to BS4884-1 1992 Specification for presentation of 
essential information. 
BS 4884-2 This document conforms to BS4884-2 1993 Guide to content 
BS 4884-3 This document conforms to BS4884-3 1993 Guide to presentation 
BS EN 60068-2-1 
-30°C (-22°F) 
(Minimum temperature) 
BS EN 60068-2-2 
(Maximum 
temperature) 
+70°C (158°F) 
BS EN 60950 Safety of information technology equipment, including electrical business 
equipment 
BS EN 61000-6-2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard (Industrial) 
BS EN 61000-6-4 EMC Generic Emission Standard (Industrial) 
BS EN 60529 
(Degrees of protection 
provided by enclosures) 
IP65 (front of module when installed into the control panel with the supplied 
sealing gasket) 
IP42 (front of module when installed into the control panel WITHOUT being 
sealed to the panel) 
UL508 
NEMA rating 
(Approximate) 
12 (Front of module when installed into the control panel with the supplied 
sealing gasket). 
2 (Front of module when installed into the control panel WITHOUT being 
sealed to the panel) 
IEEE C37.2 
(Standard Electrical 
Power System Device 
Function Numbers and 
Contact Designations) 
Under the scope of IEEE 37.2, function numbers can also be used to 
represent functions in microprocessor devices and software programs. 
The 8000 series controller is device number 11L-8000 (Multifunction device 
protecting Line (generator) – 8620 series module). 
As the module is configurable by the generator OEM, the functions covered 
by the module will vary. Under the module’s factory configuration, the device 
numbers included within the module are : 
2 – Time delay starting or closing relay 
6 –Starting circuit breaker 
27AC – AC undervoltage relay 
27DC – DC undervoltage relay 
30 – annunciator relay 
42 – Running circuit breaker 
50 – instantaneous overcurrent relay 
51 – ac time overcurrent relay 
52 – ac circuit breaker 
59AC – AC overvoltage relay 
59DC – DC overvoltage relay 
62 – time delay stopping or opening relay 
63 – pressure switch 
74– alarm relay 
81 – frequency relay 
86 – lockout relay 
In line with our policy of continual development, Deep Sea Electronics, reserve the right to change specification without notice.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
34 
3.14.1 ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATIONS 
IP CLASSIFICATIONS 
8600 series specification under BS EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures 
IP65 (Front of module when module is installed into the control panel with the optional sealing gasket). 
IP42 (front of module when module is installed into the control panel WITHOUT being sealed to the panel) 
First Digit Second Digit 
Protection against contact and ingress of solid objects Protection against ingress of water 
0 No protection 0 No protection 
1 Protected against ingress solid objects with a 
diameter of more than 50 mm. No protection against 
deliberate access, e.g. with a hand, but large surfaces 
of the body are prevented from approach. 
1 Protection against dripping water falling vertically. No 
harmful effect must be produced (vertically falling drops). 
2 Protected against penetration by solid objects with a 
diameter of more than 12 mm. Fingers or similar 
objects prevented from approach. 
2 Protection against dripping water falling vertically. There 
must be no harmful effect when the equipment (enclosure) 
is tilted at an angle up to 15° from its normal pos ition 
(drops falling at an angle). 
3 Protected against ingress of solid objects with a 
diameter of more than 2.5 mm. Tools, wires etc. with a 
thickness of more than 2.5 mm are prevented from 
approach. 
3 Protection against water falling at any angle up to 60° 
from the vertical. There must be no harmful effect (spray 
water). 
4 Protected against ingress of solid objects with a 
diameter of more than 1 mm. Tools, wires etc. with a 
thickness of more than 1 mm are prevented from 
approach. 
4 Protection against water splashed against the equipment 
(enclosure) from any direction. There must be no harmful 
effect (splashing water). 
5 Protected against harmful dust deposits. Ingress of 
dust is not totally prevented but the dust must not enter 
in sufficient quantity to interface with satisfactory 
operation of the equipment. Complete protection 
against contact. 
5 Protection against water projected from a nozzle against 
the equipment (enclosure) from any direction. There must 
be no harmful effect (water jet). 
6 Protection against ingress of dust (dust tight). 
Complete protection against contact. 
6 Protection against heavy seas or powerful water jets. 
Water must not enter the equipment (enclosure) in harmful 
quantities (splashing over).
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
35 
3.14.2 NEMA CLASSIFICATIONS 
8600 series NEMA Rating (Approximate) 
12 (Front of module when module is installed into the control panel with the optional sealing gasket). 
2 (front of module when module is installed into the control panel WITHOUT being sealed to the panel) 
NOTE: - There is no direct equivalence between IP / NEMA ratings. IP figures shown are 
approximate only. 
1 
IP30 
Provides a degree of protection against contact with the enclosure equipment and against a limited amount of falling dirt. 
2 
IP31 
Provides a degree of protection against limited amounts of falling water and dirt. 
3 
IP64 
Provides a degree of protection against windblown dust, rain and sleet; undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. 
3R 
IP32 
Provides a degree of protection against rain and sleet:; undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. 
4 (X) 
IP66 
Provides a degree of protection against splashing water, windblown dust and rain, hose directed water; undamaged by the formation 
of ice on the enclosure. (Resist corrosion). 
12/12K 
IP65 
Provides a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt and dripping non corrosive liquids. 
13 
IP65 
Provides a degree of protection against dust and spraying of water, oil and non corrosive coolants.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
Terminals 39-46 Terminals 47-50 Terminals 51-57 Terminals 60-68 
36 
4 INSTALLATION 
The DSE8xxx Series module is designed to be mounted on the panel fascia. For dimension and 
mounting details, see the section entitled Specification, Dimension and mounting elsewhere in this 
document. 
4.1 TERMINAL DESCRIPTION 
To aid user connection, icons are used on the rear of the module to help identify terminal functions. An 
example of this is shown below. 
NOTE : Availability of some terminals depends upon module version. Full details are given 
in the section entitled Terminal Description elsewhere in this manual. 
Terminals 1-13 Terminals 15-19 Terminals 22-36 
USB (B) 
PC configuration 
connection. 
USB 
Serial and 
part 
number 
label 
Ethernet
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
4.1.1 DC SUPPLY, FUEL AND START OUTPUTS, OUTPUTS E-J 
37 
PIN 
No 
DESCRIPTION CABLE 
SIZE 
NOTES 
1 
DC Plant Supply Input 
(Negative) 
2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
2 
DC Plant Supply Input 
(Positive) 
2.5 mm² 
AWG 13 
(Recommended Maximum Fuse 15A anti-surge) 
Supplies the module (2A anti-surge requirement) and 
Output relays E,F,G & H 
3 Emergency Stop Input 
2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
Plant Supply Positive. Also supplies outputs 1 & 2. 
(Recommended Maximum Fuse 20A) 
4 Output relay A (FUEL) 2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
Plant Supply Positive from terminal 3. 15 Amp rated. 
Fixed as FUEL relay if electronic engine is not configured. 
5 Output relay B (START) 
2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
Plant Supply Positive from terminal 3. 15 Amp rated. 
Fixed as START relay if electronic engine is not 
configured. 
6 Charge fail / excite 
2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
Do not connect to ground (battery negative). 
If charge alternator is not fitted, leave this terminal 
disconnected. 
7 Functional Earth 2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
Connect to a good clean earth point. 
8 Output relay E 1.0mm² 
AWG 18 
Plant Supply Positive from terminal 2. 3 Amp rated. 
9 Output relay F 1.0mm² 
AWG 18 
Plant Supply Positive from terminal 2. 3 Amp rated. 
10 Output relay G 1.0mm² 
AWG 18 
Plant Supply Positive. from terminal 2. 3 Amp rated. 
11 Output relay H 1.0mm² 
AWG 18 
Plant Supply Positive from terminal 2. 3 Amp rated. 
12 Output relay I 1.0mm² 
AWG 18 
Plant Supply Positive from terminal 2. 3 Amp rated. 
13 Output relay J 1.0mm² 
AWG 18 
Plant Supply Positive from terminal 2. 3 Amp rated. 
NOTE:- Terminal 14 is not fitted to the DSE 8620 controller. 
NOTE:- When the module is configured for operation with an electronic engine, FUEL and 
START output requirements may be different. Refer to Electronic Engines and DSE Wiring for 
further information. Part No. 057-004.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
38 
4.1.2 ANALOGUE SENSOR 
PIN 
No 
DESCRIPTION CABLE 
SIZE 
NOTES 
15 Sensor Common Return 
0.5mm² 
AWG 20 Return feed for sensors* 
16 Oil Pressure Input 
0.5mm² 
AWG 20 Connect to Oil pressure sensor 
17 Coolant Temperature Input 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Connect to Coolant Temperature sensor 
18 Fuel Level input 
0.5mm² 
AWG 20 Connect to Fuel Level sensor 
19 
Flexible sensor 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 Connect to additional sensor (user configurable) 
NOTE:- Terminals 20 and 21 are not fitted to the 8600 series controller. 
NOTE: - It is VERY important that terminal 15 (sensor common) is soundly connected to an 
earth point on the ENGINE BLOCK, not within the control panel, and must be a sound electrical 
connection to the sensor bodies. This connection MUST NOT be used to provide an earth 
connection for other terminals or devices. The simplest way to achieve this is to run a 
SEPARATE earth connection from the system earth star point, to terminal 15 directly, and not 
use this earth for other connections. 
NOTE: - If you use PTFE insulating tape on the sensor thread when using earth return 
sensors, ensure you do not insulate the entire thread, as this will prevent the sensor body from 
being earthed via the engine block.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
4.1.3 MAGNETIC PICKUP, CAN AND EXPANSION 
39 
PIN 
No 
DESCRIPTION CABLE 
SIZE 
NOTES 
22 Magnetic pickup Positive 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Connect to Magnetic Pickup device 
23 Magnetic pickup Negative 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Connect to Magnetic Pickup device 
24 Magnetic pickup screen Shield Connect to ground at one end only 
25 CAN port H 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Use only 120W CAN approved cable 
26 CAN port L 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Use only 120W CAN approved cable 
27 CAN port Common 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Use only 120W CAN approved cable 
28 DSENet expansion + 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Use only 120W RS485 approved cable 
29 DSENet expansion - 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Use only 120W RS485 approved cable 
30 DSENet expansion SCR 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Use only 120W RS485 approved cable 
MSC 
31 Multiset Comms (MSC) Link H 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Use only 120W RS485 approved cable 
32 Multiset Comms (MSC) Link L 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Use only 120W RS485 approved cable 
33 Multiset Comms (MSC) Link SCR 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Use only 120W RS485 approved cable 
GOV 
34 Analogue Governor Output B 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
35 Analogue Governor Output A 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
AVR 
37 Analogue AVR Output B 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
38 Analogue AVR Output A 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
NOTE:- Terminal 36 is not fitted to the 8620 controller 
NOTE:- Screened cable must be used for connecting the Magnetic Pickup, ensuring that 
the screen is earthed at one end ONLY. 
NOTE:- Screened 120W impedance cable specified for use with CAN must be used for the 
CAN link and the Multiset comms link. 
DSE stock and supply Belden cable 9841 which is a high quality 120W impedance cable suitable 
for CAN use (DSE part number 016-030) 
NOTE:- When the module is configured for CAN operation, terminals 22, 23 & 24 should be 
left unconnected. Engine speed is transmitted to the 8620 series controller on the CAN link. 
Refer to Electronic Engines and DSE Wiring for further information. Part No. 057-004.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
4.1.4 V1 LOAD SWITCHING AND GENERATOR VOLTAGE SENSING 
40 
PIN 
No 
DESCRIPTION CABLE 
SIZE 
NOTES 
39 Output relay C 1.0mm 
AWG 18 
Normally configured to control mains contactor coil 
(Recommend 10A fuse) 
40 Output relay C 1.0mm 
AWG 18 
Normally configured to control mains contactor coil 
41 Output relay D 1.0mm 
AWG 18 
Normally configured to control generator contactor coil 
(Recommend 10A fuse) 
42 Output relay D 1.0mm 
AWG 18 
Normally configured to control generator contactor coil 
V1 
43 Generator L1 (U) voltage 
monitoring 
1.0mm² 
AWG 18 
Connect to generator L1 (U) output (AC) 
(Recommend 2A fuse) 
44 Generator L2 (V) voltage 
monitoring input 
1.0mm² 
AWG 18 
Connect to generator L2 (V) output (AC) 
(Recommend 2A fuse) 
45 Generator L3 (W) voltage 
monitoring input 
1.0mm² 
AWG 18 
Connect to generator L3 (W) output (AC) 
(Recommend 2A fuse) 
46 Generator Neutral (N) input 1.0mm² 
AWG 18 
Connect to generator Neutral terminal (AC) 
NOTE:- The above table describes connections to a three phase, four wire alternator. For 
alternative wiring topologies, please see the ALTERNATIVE AC TOPOLOGIES section of this 
manual. 
4.1.5 V2 MAINS VOLTAGE SENSING 
PIN 
No 
DESCRIPTION CABLE 
SIZE 
NOTES 
V2 
47 Mains L1 (R) voltage monitoring 1.0mm 
AWG 18 
Connect to Mains L1 (R) incoming supply (AC) 
(Recommend 2A fuse) 
48 Mains L2 (S) voltage monitoring 1.0mm 
AWG 18 
Connect to Mains L1 (S) incoming supply (AC) 
(Recommend 2A fuse) 
49 Mains L3 (T) voltage monitoring 1.0mm 
AWG 18 
Connect to Mains L1 (T) incoming supply (AC) 
(Recommend 2A fuse) 
50 Mains Neutral (N) input 1.0mm 
AWG 18 
Connect to Mains N incoming supply (AC)
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
4.1.6 GENERATOR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 
WARNING!:- Do not disconnect this plug when the CTs are carrying current. 
Disconnection will open circuit the secondary of the C.T.’s and dangerous voltages may then 
develop. Always ensure the CTs are not carrying current and the CTs are short circuit 
connected before making or breaking connections to the module. 
NOTE:- The DSE8620 module has a burden of 0.5VA on the CT. Ensure the CT is rated for 
the burden of the DSE 8620 controller, the cable length being used and any other equipment 
sharing the CT. If in doubt, consult your CT supplier. 
41 
PIN 
No 
DESCRIPTION CABLE 
SIZE 
NOTES 
51 CT Secondary for Gen L1 2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
Connect to s1 secondary of L1 monitoring CT 
52 CT Secondary for Gen L2 2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
Connect to s1 secondary of L2 monitoring CT 
53 CT Secondary for Gen L3 2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
Connect to s1 secondary of L3 monitoring CT 
Connection to terminals 54 & 55 
The function of terminals 54 and 55 change position depending upon wiring topology as follows : 
Topology Pin 
No 
Description CABLE 
SIZE 
No earth fault measuring 
54 DO NOT CONNECT 
55 Connect to s2 of the CTs connected to 
L1,L2,L3,N 
2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
Restricted earth fault measuring 
54 Connect to s2 of the CTs connected to 
L1,L2,L3,N 
2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
55 Connect to s1 of the CT on the neutral 
conductor 
2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
Un-restricted earth fault measuring 
(Earth fault CT is fitted in the neutral to earth 
link) 
54 Connect to s1 of the CT on the neutral to 
earth conductor. 
2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
55 
Connect to s2 of the CT on the neutral to 
earth link. 
Also connect to the s2 of CTs connected to 
L1, L2, L3. 
2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
4.1.7 MAINS CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 
PIN 
No 
DESCRIPTION 
CABLE 
SIZE 
NOTES 
56 CT Secondary for Mains L1 2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
Connect to s1 secondary of L1 monitoring CT 
57 CT Secondary for Mains L2 2.5mm² 
AWG 13 
Connect to s2 secondary of L2 monitoring CT 
NOTE:- Take care to ensure correct polarity of the CT primary as shown overleaf. If in 
doubt, check with the CT supplier. 
NOTE: - Terminals 56 to 59 are not fitted to the 8610 series controller.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
42 
CT CONNECTIONS 
p1, k or K is the primary of the CT that ‘points’ towards the GENERATOR 
p2, l or L is the primary of the CT that ‘points’ towards the LOAD 
s1 is the secondary of the CT that connects to the DSE Module’s input for the CT measuring 
(I1,I2,I3) 
s2 is the secondary of the CT that should be commoned with the s2 connections of all the other CTs 
and connected to the CT common terminal of the DSE8600 series modules. 
CT labelled as 
p1, k or K 
To Load 
CT labelled as 
To Supply p2, l or L
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
4.1.8 CONFIGURABLE DIGITAL INPUTS 
43 
PIN 
No 
DESCRIPTION CABLE 
SIZE 
NOTES 
60 Configurable digital input A 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Switch to negative 
61 Configurable digital input B 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Switch to negative 
62 Configurable digital input C 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Switch to negative 
63 Configurable digital input D 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Switch to negative 
64 Configurable digital input E 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Switch to negative 
65 Configurable digital input F 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Switch to negative 
66 Configurable digital input G 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Switch to negative 
67 Configurable digital input H 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Switch to negative 
68 Configurable digital input I 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Switch to negative 
69 Configurable digital input J 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Switch to negative 
70 Configurable digital input K 0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
Switch to negative 
NOTE:- See the software manual for full range of configurable outputs available. 
4.1.9 PC CONFIGURATION INTERFACE CONNECTOR 
DESCRIPTION CABLE 
SIZE 
NOTES 
Socket for connection to PC with 86xx 
series PC software. 
0.5mm² 
AWG 20 
This is a standard USB type A 
to type B connector. 
NOTE:- The USB connection cable between the PC and the 8600 series module must not 
be extended beyond 5m (yards). For distances over 5m, it is possible to use a third party USB 
extender. Typically, they extend USB up to 50m (yards). The supply and support of this type of 
equipment is outside the scope of Deep Sea Electronics PLC. 
CAUTION!: Care must be taken not to overload the PCs USB system by connecting more 
than the recommended number of USB devices to the PC. For further information, consult your 
PC supplier. 
CAUTION!: This socket must not be used for any other purpose.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
44 
4.1.10 RS485 CONNECTOR 
PIN No NOTES 
A Two core screened twisted pair cable. 
120W impedance suitable for RS485 use. 
Recommended cable type - Belden 9841 
Max distance 1200m (1.2km) when using Belden 9841 or direct equivalent. 
B 
SCR 
Location of RS485 connector 
4.1.11 RS232 CONNECTOR 
PIN No NOTES 
1 Received Line Signal Detector (Data Carrier Detect) 
2 Received Data 
3 Transmit Data 
4 Data Terminal Ready 
5 Signal Ground 
6 Data Set Ready 
7 Request To Send 
8 Clear To Send 
9 Ring Indicator 
Location of RS232 
connector 
View looking into the male connector on the 8000 series module
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
4.2 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS 
As every system has different requirements, these diagrams show only a TYPICAL system and do not 
intend to show a complete system. 
Genset manufacturers and panel builders may use these diagrams as a starting point; however, you 
are referred to the completed system diagram provided by your system manufacturer for complete 
wiring detail. 
Further wiring suggestions are available in the following DSE publications, available at 
www.deepseaplc.com to website members. 
DSE PART DESCRIPTION 
056-022 Breaker Control (Training guide) 
057-004 Electronic Engines and DSE Wiring 
45
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
4.2.1 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION 
NOTE:- Earthing the neutral conductor ‘before’ the neutral CT allows the module to read 
earth faults ‘after’ the CT only (Restricted to load / downstream of the CT) 
Earthing the neutral conductor ‘after’ the neutral CT allows the module to read earth faults 
‘before’ the CT only (Restricted to generator / upstream of the CT) 
NOTE:- The MAINS CT is only required on for ‘true’ peak lop systems where the mains is 
held at a constant level and the generator provides variable power to the load. 
46
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
47 
4.3 ALTERNATIVE TOPOLOGIES 
The 8000 controller is factory configured to connect to a 3 phase, 4 wire Star connected alternator. 
This section details connections for alternative AC topologies. Ensure to configure the 8000 series 
controller to suit the required topology. 
NOTE:- Further details of module configuration are contained within the DSE8000 Series 
configuration software manual (DSE part number 057-078) 
4.3.1 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
4.3.2 SINGLE PHASE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT 
NOTE:- Earthing the neutral conductor ‘before’ the neutral CT allows the module to read 
earth faults ‘after’ the CT only (Restricted to load / downstream of the CT) 
Earthing the neutral conductor ‘after’ the neutral CT allows the module to read earth faults 
‘before’ the CT only (Restricted to generator / upstream of the CT) 
4.3.3 SINGLE PHASE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT 
48
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
4.3.4 2 PHASE (L1 & L2) 3 WIRE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT 
NOTE:- Earthing the neutral conductor ‘before’ the neutral CT allows the module to read 
earth faults ‘after’ the CT only (Restricted to load / downstream of the CT) 
Earthing the neutral conductor ‘after’ the neutral CT allows the module to read earth faults 
‘before’ the CT only (Restricted to generator / upstream of the CT) 
4.3.5 2 PHASE (L1 & L2) 3 WIRE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT 
49
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
4.3.6 2 PHASE (L1 & L3) 3 WIRE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT 
NOTE:- Earthing the neutral conductor ‘before’ the neutral CT allows the module to read 
earth faults ‘after’ the CT only (Restricted to load / downstream of the CT) 
Earthing the neutral conductor ‘after’ the neutral CT allows the module to read earth faults 
‘before’ the CT only (Restricted to generator / upstream of the CT) 
4.3.7 2 PHASE (L1 & L3) 3 WIRE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT MEASURING 
50
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
4.3.8 3 PHASE 4 WIRE WITH UNRESTRICTED EARTH FAULT MEASURING 
NOTE:- Unrestricted Earth Fault Protection detects earth faults in the load and in the 
generator. Be sure to measure the natural earth fault of the site before deciding upon an earth 
fault alarm trip level. 
51 
4.3.9 EARTH SYSTEMS 
4.3.9.1 Negative Earth 
The typical wiring diagrams located within this document show connections for a negative earth system 
(the battery negative connects to Earth) 
4.3.9.2 Positive Earth 
When using a DSE module with a Positive Earth System (the battery positive connects to Earth), the 
following points must be followed: 
· Follow the typical wiring diagram as normal for all sections EXCEPT the earth points 
· All points shown as Earth on the typical wiring diagram should connect to BATTERY 
NEGATIVE (not earth). 
4.3.9.3 Floating earth 
Where neither the battery positive nor battery negative terminals are connected to earth the following 
points must to be followed 
· Follow the typical wiring diagram as normal for all sections EXCEPT the earth points 
· All points shown as Earth on the typical wiring diagram should connect to BATTERY 
NEGATIVE (not earth).
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
4.4 TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT OF DSENET® 
Twenty (20) devices can be connected to the DSENet®, made up of the following devices : 
Device Max number supported 
DSE2130 Input Expansion 4 
DSE2157 Output Expansion 10 
DSE2548 LED Expansion 10 
For part numbers of the expansion modules and their documentation, see section entitled DSENet 
Expansion Modules elsewhere in this manual. 
52
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
53 
4.4.1 EARTH SYSTEMS 
4.4.1.1 Negative Earth 
The typical wiring diagrams located within this document show connections for a negative earth system 
(the battery negative connects to Earth) 
4.4.1.2 Positive Earth 
When using a DSE module with a Positive Earth System (the battery positive connects to Earth), the 
following points must be followed: 
· Follow the typical wiring diagram as normal for all sections EXCEPT the earth points 
· All points shown as Earth on the typical wiring diagram should connect to BATTERY 
NEGATIVE (not earth). 
4.4.1.3 Floating Earth 
Where neither the battery positive nor battery negative terminals are connected to earth, the following 
points must to be followed 
· Follow the typical wiring diagram as normal for all sections EXCEPT the earth points 
· All points shown as Earth on the typical wiring diagram should connect to BATTERY 
NEGATIVE (not earth).
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
5 DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS 
The following section details the function and meaning of the various controls on the module. 
5.1 DSE8620 AUTOMATIC MAINS FAILURE (AMF) CONTROL MODULE 
54 
Menu navigation 
buttons 
Four configurable 
LEDs 
Select Stop 
mode 
Select Manual 
mode 
Select Auto 
mode 
Transfer to 
Generator 
(manual mode 
only) 
Start engine(s) 
(when in 
manual or 
Testmode) 
Mute alarm / 
Lamp test 
Transfer to 
mains (manual 
mode only) 
Main status and 
instrumentation display 
Select Test 
mode
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
55 
Mains Available 
LED. 
On when the 
mains is within 
limits and able to 
take load. 
Close Mains LED. 
On When The Mains Is On 
Load. 
Close Bus LED. 
On When The Bus Is On 
Load. 
Generator 
Available 
LED. 
On when the 
generator is 
within limits 
and able to 
take load.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
5.2 VIEWING THE INSTRUMENT PAGES 
It is possible to scroll to display the different pages of information by repeatedly operating the next / 
If you want to view one of the 
instrument pages towards the 
end of the list, it may be 
quicker to scroll left through 
the pages rather than right! 
56 
previous page buttons . 
Example 
Status Engine Generator 
And so on until the last page is reached. 
A Further press of the scroll right button 
returns the display to the Status page. 
The complete order and contents of each information page are given in the following sections 
Once selected the page will remain on the LCD display until the user selects a different page, or after 
an extended period of inactivity (LCD Page Timer), the module will revert to the status display. 
If no buttons are pressed upon entering an instrumentation page, the instruments will be displayed 
automatically subject to the setting of the LCD Scroll Timer. 
The LCD Page and LCD Scroll timers are configurable using the DSE Configuration Suite Software or 
by using the Front Panel Editor. 
The screenshot shows the factory 
settings for the timers, taken from 
the DSE Configuration Suite 
Software. 
Alternatively, to scroll manually through all instruments on the currently selected page, press the scroll 
buttons. The ‘autoscroll’ is disabled. 
If you want to view one of the 
instruments towards the end 
of the list, it may be quicker to 
scroll up through the 
instruments rather than down! 
To re-enable ‘autoscroll’ press the scroll buttons to scroll to the ‘title’ of the instrumentation 
page (ie Engine). A short time later (the duration of the LCD Scroll Timer), the instrumentation display 
will begin to autoscroll. 
When scrolling manually, the display will automatically return to the Status page if no buttons are 
pressed for the duration of the configurable LCD Page Timer. 
If an alarm becomes active while viewing the status page, the display shows the Alarms page to draw 
the operator’s attention to the alarm condition.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
‘Stop Mode’ etc is 
displayed on the 
Home Page 
57 
5.2.1 STATUS 
This is the ‘home’ page, the page that is displayed when no other page has been selected, and the 
page that is automatically displayed after a period of inactivity (LCD Page Timer) of the module control 
buttons. 
This page will change with the action of the controller , when on gen generator parameters will be seen 
and when changing to mains the mains parameters will be shown. 
SSSSttttaaaattttuuuussss 22222222::::33331111 Factory setting of Status screen showing engine stopped... 
GGGGeeeennnneeeerrrraaaattttoooorrrr aaaatttt RRRReeeesssstttt 
SSSSttttoooopppp MMMMooooddddeeee 
SSSSaaaaffffeeeettttyyyy oooonnnn DDDDeeeellllaaaayyyy 
00000000::::00004444 
...and engine running 
L-NNNN 222211115555VVVV 44443333AAAA 
L-LLLL 333377773333VVVV 
44447777....5555HHHHzzzz 
0000kkkkWWWW 
0000....0000ppppffff 
The contents of this display may vary depending upon configuration by the generator manufacturer / 
supplier. 
The display above is achieved with the factory settings, shown below in the DSE Configuration suite 
software: 
With a summary of the 
instrumentation shown when 
the engine is running. 
Other pages can be configured to 
be shown, automatically scrolling 
when the set is running. 
NOTE:- The following sections detail instrumentation pages, accessible using the scroll 
left and right buttons, regardless of what pages are configured to be displayed on the ‘status’ 
screen.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
58 
5.2.2 ENGINE 
Contains instrumentation gathered about the engine itself, some of which may be obtained using the 
CAN or other electronic engine link. 
· Engine Speed 
· Oil Pressure 
· Coolant Temperature 
· Engine Battery Volts 
· Engine Run Time 
· Engine Fuel Level 
· Oil Temperature* 
· Coolant Pressure* 
· Inlet Temperature* 
· Exhaust Temperature* 
· Fuel Temperature* 
· Turbo Pressure* 
· Fuel Pressure* 
· Fuel Consumption* 
· Fuel Used* 
· Fuel Level* 
· Auxiliary Sensors (If fitted and configured) 
· Engine Maintenance Due (If configured) 
· Engine ECU Link* 
*When connected to suitably configured and compatible engine ECU. For details of supported engines 
see ‘Electronic Engines and DSE wiring’ (DSE Part number 057-004). 
· Tier 4 engine information will also be available if used with a Tier 4 suitable engine / ECU. 
Depending upon configuration and instrument function, some of the instrumentation items may include a 
tick icon beside them. This denotes a further function is available, detailed in the ‘operation’ section 
of this document. 
Example: 
The tick icon denotes that manual fuel pump control is 
enabled in this system. 
Press and hold to start the fuel transfer pump, release to 
stop the pump. This is detailed further in the section entitled 
‘operation’ elsewhere in this document.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
5.2.3 GENERATOR 
Contains electrical values of the generator (alternator), measured or derived from the module’s voltage 
and current inputs. 
59 
· Generator Voltage (ph-N) 
· Generator Voltage (ph-ph) 
· Generator Frequency 
· Generator Current 
· Generator Earth Current 
· Generator Load % 
· Generator Load (kW) 
· Generator Load (kVA) 
· Generator Power Factor 
· Generator Power Factor Average 
· Generator Load (kVAr) 
· Generator Load (kWh, kVAh, kVArh) 
· Generator Phase Sequence 
· Generator config (Nominals) 
· Generator Active Config 
· Synchroscope display 
5.2.4 MAINS 
· Mains Voltage (ph-N) 
· Mains Voltage (ph-ph) 
· Mains Frequency 
· Mains Current 
· Mains Load (kW) 
· Mains Load Total (kW) 
· Mains Load (kVA) 
· Mains Load Total (kVA) 
· Mains Power Factor 
· Mains Power Factor Average 
· Mains Load (kVAr) 
· Mains Load (kWh, kVAh, kVArh) 
· Mains Phase Sequence 
· Mains config (Nominals) 
· Mains Active Config
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
5.2.1 RS232 SERIAL PORT 
This section is included to give information about the RS232 serial port and external modem (if 
connected). 
The items displayed on this page will change depending upon configuration of the module. You are 
referred to your system supplier for further details. 
NOTE:- Factory Default settings are for the RS232 port to be enabled with no modem 
connected, operating at 19200 baud, modbus slave address 10. 
Example 1 – Module connected to an RS232 telephone modem. 
When the DSE8610 series module is power up, it will send ‘initialisation strings’ to the connected 
modem. It is important therefore that the modem is already powered, or is powered up at the same 
time as the DSE86xx series module. At regular intervals after power up, the modem is reset, and 
reinitialised, to ensure the modem does not ‘hang up’. 
If the DSE8610 series module does not correctly communicate with the modem, “Modem initialising’ 
appears on the Serial Port instrument screen as shown overleaf. 
If the module is set for “incoming calls” or for “incoming and outgoing calls”, then if the modem is 
dialled, it will answer after two rings (using the factory setting ‘initialisation strings)’. Once the call is 
established, all data is passed from the dialling PC and the DSE8610 series module. 
If the module is set for “outgoing calls” or for “incoming and outgoing calls”, then the module will dial out 
whenever an alarm is generated. Note that not all alarms will generate a dial out; this is dependant 
upon module configuration of the event log. Any item configured to appear in the event log will cause a 
dial out. 
Press down to view the modem status.... 
Indicates that a modem is configured. Shows ‘RS232’ if no 
modem is configured. 
60
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
61 
Example 1 continued – Modem diagnostics 
Modem diagnostic screens are included; press when viewing the RS232 Serial Port instrument 
to cycle the available screens. If you are experiencing modem communication problems, this 
information will aid troubleshooting. 
SSSSeeeerrrriiiiaaaallll PPPPoooorrrrtttt 
RRRRTTTTSSSS 
CCCCTTTTSSSS 
DDDDSSSSRRRR 
DDDDTTTTRRRR 
DDDDCCCCDDDD 
Line Description 
RTS Request To Send Flow control 
CTS Clear To Send Flow control 
DSR Data Set Ready Ready to communicate 
DTR Data Terminal Ready Ready to communicate 
DCD Data Carrier Detect Modem is connected 
MMMMooooddddeeeemmmm CCCCoooommmmmmmmaaaannnnddddssss 
RRRRxxxx:::: OOOOKKKK 
TTTTxxxx:::: AAAATTTT++++IIIIPPPPRRRR====9999666600000000 
RRRRxxxx:::: OOOOKKKK 
Modem Setup Sequence 
1) 
If the Modem and DSE8600 series communicate successfully: 
2) 
Shows the state of the modem communication lines. These can 
help diagnose connection problems. 
Example: 
RTS A dark background shows the line is active. 
RTS a grey background shows that the line is toggling high and 
low. 
RTS No background indicates that the line is inactive 
Shows the last command sent to the modem and the result of the 
command.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
In case of communication failure between the modem and DSE8600 series module, the modem is 
automatically reset and initialisation is attempted once more: 
Currently connected GSM 
operator and signal strength. 
62 
3) 
In the case of a module that is unable to communicate with the modem, the display will 
continuously cycle between ‘Modem Reset’ and ‘Modem Initialising’ as the module resets the 
modem and attempts to communicate with it again, this will continue until correct 
communication is established with the modem. 
In this instance, you should check connections and verify the modem operation. 
Example 2 – Module connected to a modem. 
Example 3 – Modem status of a GSM modem 
Many GSM modems are fitted with a status LED to show operator cell status and ringing indicator. 
These can be a useful troubleshooting tool. 
In the case of GSM connection problems, try calling the DATA number of the SIMCARD with an 
ordinary telephone. There should be two rings, followed by the modem answering the call and then 
‘squealing’. If this does not happen, you should check all modem connections and double check with the 
SIM provider that it is a DATA SIM and can operate as a data modem. DATA is NOT the same as FAX 
or GPRS and is often called Circuit Switched Data (CSD) by the SIM provider. 
NOTE: In the case of GSM modems, it is important that a DATA ENABLED SIM is used. This is often a 
different number than the ‘voice number’ and is often called Circuit Switched Data (CSD) by the SIM 
provider. 
If the GSM modem is not purchased from DSE, ensure that it has been correctly set to operate at 
9600 baud. You may need to install a terminal program on your PC and consult your modem supplier to 
do this. GSM modems purchased from DSE are already configured to work with the DSE86xx series 
module.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
5.2.1 RS485 SERIAL PORT 
This section is included to give information about the currently selected serial port and external modem 
(if connected). 
The items displayed on this page will change depending upon configuration of the module. You are 
referred to your system supplier for further details. 
NOTE:- Factory Default settings are for the RS485 port to operating at 19200 baud, 
63 
modbus slave address 10. 
Module RS485 port configured for connection to a modbus master. 
DSE86xx series modules operate as a modbus RTU slave device. 
In a modbus system, there can be only one Master, typically a PLC, HMI 
system or PC SCADA system. 
This master requests for information from the modbus slave (DSE86xx 
series module) and may (in control systems) also send request to change operating modes etc. Unless 
the Master makes a request, the slave is ‘quiet’ on the data link. 
The factory settings are for the module to communicate at 19200 baud, modbus slave address 10. 
To use the RS485 port, ensure that ‘port usage’ is correctly set using the DSE Configuration Suite 
Software. 
Required settings are shown below. 
‘Master inactivity timeout’ should be set to at least twice the value of the system scan time. For 
example if a modbus master PLC requests data from the DSE86xx modbus slave once per second, the 
timeout should be set to at least 2 seconds. 
The DSE Modbus Gencomm document containing register mappings inside the DSE module is 
available upon request from support@deepseaplc.com. Email your request along with the serial 
number of your DSE module to ensure the correct information is sent to you.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
64 
Typical requests (using Pseudo code) 
BatteryVoltage=ReadRegister(10,0405,1) : reads register (hex) 0405 as a single register (battery volts) 
from slave address 10. 
WriteRegister(10,1008,2,35701, 65535-35701) : Puts the module into AUTO mode by writing to (hex) 
register 1008, the values 35701 (auto mode) and register 1009 the value 65535-35701 (the bitwise 
opposite of auto mode) 
Shutdown=(ReadRegister(10,0306,1) >> 12) & 1) : reads (hex) 0306 and looks at bit 13 (shutdown alarm 
present) 
Warning=(ReadRegister(10,0306,1) >> 11) & 1) : reads (hex) 0306 and looks at bit 12 (Warning alarm 
present) 
ElectricalTrip=(ReadRegister(10,0306,1) >> 10) & 1) : reads (hex) 0306 and looks at bit 11 (Electrical 
Trip alarm present) 
ControlMode=ReadRegister(10,0304,2); reads (hex) register 0304 (control mode). 
5.2.2 ABOUT 
Contains important information about the module and the firmware versions. This information may be 
asked for when contacting DSE Technical Support Department for advice. 
· Module Type (i.e. 8620) 
· Application Version – The version of the module’s main firmware file – Updatable using the 
Firmware Update Wizard in the DSE Configuration Suite Software. 
· USB ID – unique identifier for PC USB connection 
· Analogue Measurements software version 
· Firmware Update Boot loader software version. 
5.2.2.1 Ethernet Pages 
· Update Network settings using DSE Configuration Suite Software+ 1 Power cycle off/on 
before the editor pages are updated.. 
NNNNeeeettttwwwwoooorrrrkkkk 
IIIIPPPP aaaaddddddddrrrreeeessssssss 
111199992222....xxxxxxxxxxxx....xxxxxxxx....xxxxxxxx 
DDDDHHHHCCCCPPPP DDDDiiiissssaaaabbbblllleeeedddd 
NNNNeeeettttwwwwoooorrrrkkkk 
SSSSuuuubbbbnnnneeeetttt mmmmaaaasssskkkk 
222255555555....222255555555....222255555555....0000 
NNNNeeeettttwwwwoooorrrrkkkk 
GGGGaaaatttteeeewwwwaaaayyyy aaaaddddddddrrrreeeessssssss 
111199992222....xxxxxxxxxxxx....xxxxxxxx....xxxxxxxxxxxx 
NNNNeeeettttwwwwoooorrrrkkkk 
DDDDNNNNSSSS aaaaddddddddrrrreeeessssssss 
111199992222....xxxxxxxxxxxx....xxxxxxxx....xxxxxxxx
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
65 
NNNNeeeettttwwwwoooorrrrkkkk 
MMMMAAAACCCC aaaaddddddddrrrreeeessssssss 
EEEE8888....AAAA4444....CCCC1111....0000....AAAA....CCCC2222 
DDDDHHHHCCCCPPPP 
HHHHOOOOSSSSTTTT 
DDDDOOOOMMMMAAAAIIIINNNN 
VVVVeeeennnnddddoooorrrr 
MMMMOOOODDDDBBBBUUUUSSSS oooovvvveeeerrrr IIIIPPPP 
TTTTCCCCPPPP PPPPoooorrrrtttt 555500002222 
PPPPrrrreeeeffff IIIIPPPP 0000....0000....0000....0000 
Pages available in the “ABOUT” screen to confirm Network settings. 
Data Logging Pages 
The DSE data logging pages show information depending on the configuration in the module. 
Data Logging 
Log to internal memory 
Logging active 
No USB drive present 
Inserting a USB drive to the host USB will display the following change to the page. 
Data Logging 
Log to USB drive 
Logging active 
Do not remove USB drive 
NOTE:- Removal of the USB drive should only be carried out using the following method. 
Press and hold the tick button until “Ok to remove USB drive” is displayed. 
Data Logging 
Log to USB drive 
Logging active 
Ok to remove USB drive 
It is now safe to remove the USB drive. 
This ensures the logging data file will save to memory complete and will not become corrupt. 
Press down to view the next page. 
Data Logging 
Unique setting for each module 
Location of stored data. 
Internal module memory or external 
USB memory. 
If data logging is active or inactive 
Remaining time available for logging 
information. 
xxxx hours xx minutes
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
66 
Time remaining 
xxxx h xx m 
Press down to view the next page. 
Data Logging 
Memory remaining 
xxxx 
. 
5.2.1 CAN ERROR MESSAGES 
When connected to a suitable CAN engine the 8620 series controller displays alarm status messages 
from the ECU. 
Alarm 
ECU Warning 
Warning 
Press to access the list of current active Engine DTCs (Diagnostic Trouble Codes). 
Engine DTCs The code interpreted by the module shows on the display as a text message. 
Additionally, the manufacturer’s Water Level code is shown. 
Low 
Xxx,xxx,xxx 
NOTE: - For details on these code meanings, refer to the ECU instructions provided by the 
engine manufacturer, or contact the engine manufacturer for further assistance. 
NOTE: - For further details on connection to electronic engines please refer to Electronic 
engines and DSE wiring. Part No. 057-004 
Memory space remaining, this depends 
what size memory drive is fitted (Max 
16Gb) or allocated internal (2Mb) 
memory left available. 
Type of alarm that is triggered in the 
DSE module (i.e. Warning or 
Shutdown)
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
67 
5.3 VIEWING THE EVENT LOG 
The DSE8600 series modules maintain a log of past alarms and/or selected status changes. 
The log size has been increased in the module over past module updates and is always subject to 
change. At the time of writing, the 86xx series log is capable of storing the last 250 log entries. 
Under default factory settings, the event log only includes shutdown and electrical trip alarms logged 
(The event log does not contain Warning alarms); however, this is configurable by the system 
designer using the DSE Configuration Suite software. 
Example showing the 
possible configuration of the 
DSE8600 series event log 
(DSE Configuration Suite 
Software) 
This also shows the factory 
settings of the module (Only 
shutdown alarms and the 
mains status are logged). 
Once the log is full, any subsequent shutdown alarms will overwrite the oldest entry in the log. 
Hence, the log will always contain the most recent shutdown alarms. 
The module logs the alarm, along with the date and time of the event (or engine running hours if 
configured to do so). 
If the module is configured and connected to send SMS text 
To view the event log, repeatedly press the next page button until the LCD screen displays the 
Event log : 
Event log 1 
Oil Pressure Low 
Shutdown 
12 Sep 2007, 08:25:46 
This is event 1. 
Press down to view the next most recent shutdown alarm: 
Continuing to press down cycles through the past alarms after which the display shows the 
most recent alarm and the cycle begins again. 
To exit the event log and return to viewing the instruments, press the next page button to select 
the next instrumentation page.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
5.4 USER CONFIGURABLE INDICATORS 
These LEDs can be configured by the user to indicate any one of 100+ 
different functions based around the following:- 
· Indications - Monitoring of a digital input and indicating associated 
functioning user’s equipment - Such as Battery Charger On or Louvres 
Open, etc. 
· WARNINGS and SHUTDOWNS - Specific indication of a particular 
warning or shutdown condition, backed up by LCD indication - Such as 
Low Oil Pressure Shutdown, Low Coolant level, etc. 
· Status Indications - Indication of specific functions or sequences 
derived from the modules operating state - Such as Safety On, Pre-heating, 
Panel Locked, Generator Available, etc. 
68 
User configurable LEDs
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
69 
6 OPERATION 
6.1 CONTROL 
Control of the DSE8620 module is via push buttons mounted on the front of the module with 
STOP/RESET, MANUAL, TEST, AUTO, ALARM MUTE and START functions. For normal operation, 
these are the only controls which need to be operated. The smaller push buttons are used to access 
further information such as mains voltage or to change the state of the load switching devices when in 
manual mode. Details of their operation are provided later in this document. 
The following descriptions detail the sequences followed by a module containing the standard ‘factory 
configuration’. Always refer to your configuration source for the exact sequences and timers observed 
by any particular module in the field. 
CAUTION: - The module may instruct an engine start event due to external influences. Therefore, it is 
possible for the engine to start at any time without warning. Prior to performing any maintenance on the 
system, it is recommended that steps are taken to remove the battery and isolate supplies. 
NOTE: -PLC Functionality. This control module has PLC functionality built in. This can 
have change the standard operation when used.( Default configuration the no PLC is set. See 
software manual for more information)
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
70 
6.2 CONTROL PUSH-BUTTONS 
STOP/RESET 
This push-button places the module into its Stop/reset mode. This will clear any alarm 
conditions for which the triggering criteria have been removed. If the engine is running 
and this push-button is operated, the module will automatically instruct the generator 
contactor/breaker to unload the generator. The fuel supply will be removed and engine 
will be brought to a standstill. Should a remote start signal be present while 
operating in the mode, a remote start will not occur. 
MANUAL 
This push-button is used to allow manual control of the generator functions. Entering 
this mode from another mode will initially not cause any change of operating state, but 
allows further push-buttons to be used to control the generator operation. For 
example, once in Manual mode it is possible to start the engine by using the ‘START’ 
push-button. If the engine is running, off-load in the Manual mode and a remote 
start signal becomes present, the module will automatically instruct the generator 
contactor/breaker device to place the generator on load. Should the remote start 
signal then be removed the generator will remain on load until either the 
‘STOP/RESET’ or ‘AUTO’ push-buttons are operated. 
START 
This push-button is used to start the engine. The module must first be placed in the 
‘MANUAL’ mode of operation. The ‘START’ button should then be operated. The 
engine will then automatically attempt to start. Should it fail on the first attempt it will 
re-try until either the engine fires or the pre-set number of attempts have been made. 
To stop the engine the ‘STOP/RESET’ button should be operated. It is also possible 
to configure the module such that the start push-button must be held to maintain 
engine cranking. 
NOTE:- Different modes of operation are possible - Please refer to your configuration 
source for details. 
AUTO 
This push-button places the module into its ‘Automatic’ mode. This mode allows the 
module to control the function of the generator automatically. The module will monitor 
the remote start input and once a start condition is signalled the set will be 
automatically started and placed on load. If the starting signal is removed, the module 
will automatically transfer the load from the generator and shut the set down observing 
the stop delay timer and cooling timer as necessary. The module will then await the 
next start event. For further details, please see the more detailed description of ‘Auto 
Operation’ earlier in this manual. 
Mute / Lamp Test 
This button silences the audible alarm if it is sounding and illuminates all of the LEDs 
as a lamp test feature.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
Test 
This button places the module into its ‘Test’ mode. This allows an on load test of the 
generator. 
Once in Test mode the module will respond to the start button, start the engine, 
and run on load. 
For further details, please see the more detailed description of ‘Test operation’ 
elsewhere in this document. 
Transfer to mains 
Operative in Manual Mode only 
71 
‘Normal’ breaker button control 
· Allows the operator to transfer the load to the mains 
· If the Generator is on load and mains is available the generator will 
synchronise and parallel with the mains. 
· If the Generator & mains are in parallel, the generator power will ramp off and 
open the generator breaker. 
‘Alternative’ breaker button control ( Synchronises when necessary ) 
· If generator is on load, transfers the load to the mains. 
· If mains is on load, opens the mains breaker 
· If generator and mains are off load, closes the mains breaker. 
Transfer to generator 
Operative in Manual Mode only 
‘Normal’ breaker button control 
· Allows the operator to transfer the load to the generator 
· If the mains is on load and the generator is available the generator will 
synchronise and parallel with the mains. 
· If the mains & generator are in parallel the generator power will ramp up and 
open the mains breaker. 
‘Alternative’ breaker button control ( Synchronises when necessary ) 
· If mains is on load, transfers the load to the generator. 
· If generator is on load, opens the generator breaker 
· If generator and mains are off load, closes the generator breaker 
Menu navigation 
Used for navigating the instrumentation, event log and configuration screens. 
For further details, please see the more detailed description of these items elsewhere 
in this manual 
The following description details the sequences followed by a module containing the standard ‘factory 
configuration’. 
Remember that if you have purchased a completed generator set or control panel from your 
supplier, the module’sconfiguration will probably have been changed by them to suit their particular 
requirements. 
Always refer to your configuration source for the exact sequences and timers observed by any 
particular module in the field.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
6.3 DUMMY LOAD / LOAD SHEDDING CONTROL 
This feature may be enabled by the system designer to ensure the loading on the generator is kept to 
a nominal amount. If the load is low, ‘dummy loads’ (typically static load banks) can be introduced to 
ensure the engine is not too lightly loaded. Conversely as the load increases towards the maximum 
rating of the set, non-essential loads can be shed to prevent overload of the generator. 
72 
6.2.1 DUMMY LOAD CONTROL 
The dummy load control feature (if enabled) allows for a maximum of five dummy load steps. 
When the set is first started, all configured Dummy Load Control outputs are de-energised. 
Once the generator is placed onto load, the generator loading is monitored by the Dummy Load 
Control scheme. 
If the generator loading falls below the Dummy Load Control Trip setting (kW), the Dummy Load 
Control Trip Delay is displayed on the module display. If the generator loading remains at this low level 
for the duration of the timer, the first Dummy Load Control output is energised. This is used to 
energise external circuits to switch in (for instance) a static load bank. 
The generator loading has now been increased by the first dummy load. Again the generator loading is 
monitored. This continues until all configured Dummy Load Control outputs are energised. 
Should the generator loading rise above the Dummy Load Return level, the Dummy Load Return Delay 
begins. If the loading remains at these levels after the completion of the timer, the ‘highest’ active 
Dummy 
Load Control 
output is de-energised. This continues until all Dummy Load Control outputs have been de-energised. 
Example screen shot of Dummy Load Control setup in the DSE Configuration Suite 
6.2.2 LOAD SHEDDING CONTROL 
The Load Shedding Control feature (if enabled) allows for a maximum of five load shedding steps. 
When the generator is about to take load, the configured number of Load Shedding Control Outputs at 
Startup will energise. This configurable setting allows (for instance) certain loads to be removed from 
the generator prior to the set’s load switch being closed. This can be used to ensure the initial loading 
of the set is kept to a minimum, below the Load Acceptance specification of the generating set. 
The generator is then placed on load. The Load Shedding Control scheme begins. 
When the load reaches the Load Shedding Trip level the Trip Delay timer will start. If the generator 
loading is still high when the timer expires, the first Load shedding Control output will energise. When 
the load has been above the trip level for the duration of the timer the ‘next’ Load shedding Control 
output will energise and so on until all Load Shedding Control outputs are energised. 
If at any time the load falls back below the Load Shedding Return level, the Return Time will start. If 
the load remains below the return level when the timer has expired the ‘highest’ Load Shedding Control 
output that has been energised will be de-energised. This process will continue until all outputs have 
been de-energised. 
When the set enters a stopping sequence for any reason the Load Shedding control’ outputs will de-energise 
at the same time as the generator load switch is signalled to open. 
Details can be found in the 057-119 8600 Configuration suite software Manual.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
6.4 STOP MODE 
STOP mode is activated by pressing the button. 
In STOP mode, the module will remove the generator from load (if necessary) before stopping the 
engine if it is already running. 
If the engine does not stop when requested, the FAIL TO STOP alarm is activated (subject to the 
setting of the Fail to Stop timer). To detect the engine at rest the following must occur : 
· Engine speed is zero as detected by the Magnetic Pickup or CANbus ECU (depending upon 
73 
module variant). 
· Generator frequency must be zero. 
· Oil pressure switch must be closed to indicate low oil pressure (MPU version only) 
When the engine has stopped, it is possible to send configuration files to the module from DSE 
Configuration Suite PC software and to enter the Front Panel Editor to change parameters. 
Any latched alarms that have been cleared will be reset when STOP mode is entered. 
The engine will not be started when in STOP mode. If remote start signals are given, the input is 
ignored until AUTO mode is entered. 
When configured to do so, When left in STOP mode for five minutes with no presses of the fascia 
buttons, the module enters low power mode. To ‘wake’ the module, press the button or any other 
fascia control button. 
Sleep mode configuration 
in the DSE Configuration 
Suite Software
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
74 
6.4.1 ECU OVERRIDE 
NOTE:- ECU Override function is only applicable when the controller is configured for a 
CAN engine. 
NOTE:- Depending upon system design, the ECU may be powered or unpowered when the 
module is in STOP mode. ECU override is only applicable if the ECU is unpowered when in 
STOP mode. 
When the ECU powered down (as is normal when in STOP mode), it is not possible to read the 
diagnostic trouble codes or instrumentation. Additionally, it is not possible to use the engine 
manufacturers’ configuration tools. 
As the ECU is usually unpowered when the engine is not running, it must be turned on manually as 
follows : 
· Select STOP mode on the DSE controller. 
· Press and hold the START button to power the ECU. As the controller is in STOP mode, 
the engine will not be started. 
. 
· The ECU will remain powered 2 minutes after the START button is released. 
This is also useful if the engine manufacturer’s tools need to be connected to the engine, for instance to 
configure the engine as the ECU needs to be powered up to perform this operation.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
75 
6.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION 
6.5.1 MAINS FAILURE 
This mode of operation is used to ensure continuity of supply to critical loads during a mains failure 
condition. This is the normal mode of operation when installed on a standby generator. 
NOTE: If a digital input configured to panel lock is active, changing module modes will not 
be possible. Viewing the instruments and event logs is NOT affected by panel lock. 
This mode is activated by pressing the pushbutton. An LED indicator beside the button will 
illuminate to confirm this operation. 
Auto mode will allow the generator to operate fully automatically, starting and stopping as required 
with no user intervention. 
Should the mains (utility) supply fall outside the configurable limits for longer than the period of the 
mains transient delay timer, the mains (utility) available GREEN indicator LED extinguishes. 
To allow for short term mains supply transient conditions, the Start Delay timer is initiated. After this 
delay, if the pre-heat output option is selected then the pre-heat timer is initiated and the corresponding 
auxiliary output (if configured) will energise. 
NOTE: - If the mains supply returns within limits during the Start Delay timer, the unit will return to a 
stand-by state. 
After the above delays have expired the Fuel Solenoid (or enable ECU output if configured) is 
energised, then one second later, the Starter Motor is engaged. 
NOTE:- If the unit has been configured for CAN Bus, compatible ECU’s will receive the start command 
via CAN Bus. Refer to the Manual CAN and DSE Wiring. Part No. 057-004 for more information on utilising 
DSE modules with electronically controlled engines. 
The engine is cranked for a pre-set time. If the engine fails to fire during this cranking attempt then the 
starter motor is disengaged for the pre-set rest period. Should this sequence continue beyond the set 
number of attempts, the start sequence will be terminated and Fail to Start fault will be displayed. 
Alarm 
Shutdown 
Fail to start 
When the engine fires, the starter motor is disengaged and locked out at a pre-set frequency 
measured from the alternator output. Alternatively, a Magnetic Pickup mounted on the flywheel housing 
can be used for speed detection (This is selected by PC using the 86xx series configuration software). 
Rising oil pressure can also be used to disconnect the starter motor; however it cannot be used for 
underspeed or overspeed detection. 
NOTE:- If the unit has been configured for CAN Bus, speed sensing is via CAN Bus.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
After the starter motor has disengaged, the Safety On timer is activated, allowing Oil Pressure, High 
Engine Temperature, Under-speed, Charge Fail and any delayed Auxiliary fault inputs to stabilise 
without triggering the fault. 
6.5.1 ENGINE RUNNING 
Once the engine is running, the Warm Up timer, if selected, begins, allowing the engine to stabilise 
before accepting the load. 
After the Warm-up timer has expired then the module will transfer the load from the failed mains 
supply to the generator output. It will observe the following sequence. The Mains Contactor/Breaker 
will be instructed to open and after a short delay (transfer delay), the Generator Contactor/Breaker 
will be instructed to close. 
The generator will then supply the requirements of the load. 
NOTE:-A load transfer will not be initiated until the Oil Pressure has risen. This prevents excessive 
76 
wear on the engine. 
When the mains supply returns, the Stop delay timer is initiated. Once it has expired, the set is 
synchronised and paralleled with the mains supply. The system remains in this condition until expiry of 
the Parallel run timer. Once this has expired, the module will ramp the remaining load from the 
generator to mains supply. The Generator Contact/Breaker will open and the Cooling timer is then 
initiated, allowing the engine a cooling down period off load before shutting down. Once the Cooling 
timer expires, the Fuel Solenoid is de-energised, bringing the generator to a stop. 
During the parallel run, the module can be configured to either run at a fixed level output, or to maintain 
an output in relation to the load level on the mains. For full details of these mode please refer to the 
manual ‘The Guide to sync and load share Pt1’ 
Should the mains supply fall outside limits once again the set will return on load. 
NOTE: - When synchronising is enabled, the mains supply is checked before closing any load switching 
device. If the supply is live, synchronising will take place before any closure takes place. 
NOTE: - Synchronising can be disabled if the application does not require this function. Contact your 
genset supplier in the first instance for further details.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
6.5.2 REMOTE START IN ISLAND MODE 
This mode of operation is used to start the set in response to an external start requirement from 
another device. It may also be used to provide continuity of supply during expected black out events. 
NOTE:- If a digital input configured to panel lock is active, changing module modes will not be 
possible. Viewing the instruments and event log are NOT affected by panel lock. If panel lock is active 
the Panel lock indicator (if configured) illuminates. 
This mode is activated by pressing the pushbutton. An LED indicator beside the button will 
illuminate to confirm this operation. 
If the remote start in island mode input activates, the Remote Start Active indicator (if configured) 
illuminates. 
To allow for false remote start signals, the Start Delay timer is initiated. After this delay, if the pre-heat 
output option is selected then the pre-heat timer is initiated and the corresponding auxiliary output (if 
configured) will energise. 
NOTE:- If the Remote Start signal is removed during the Start Delay timer, the unit will return to a 
77 
stand-by state. 
After the above delays, the Fuel Solenoid (or enable ECU output if configured) is energised, and then 
one second later, the Starter Motor is engaged. 
NOTE: - If the unit has been configured for CAN Bus, compatible ECU’s will receive the start command 
via CAN Bus. Refer to the Manual CAN and DSE Wiring. Part No. 057-004 for more information on utilising 
DSE modules with electronically controlled engines. 
The engine is cranked for a pre-set time. If the engine fails to fire during this cranking attempt then the 
starter motor is disengaged for the pre-set rest period. Should this sequence continue beyond the set 
number of attempts, the start sequence will be terminated and Fail to Start fault will be displayed. 
Alarm 
Shutdown 
Fail to start 
When the engine fires, the starter motor is disengaged and locked out at a pre-set frequency 
measured from the alternator output. Alternatively, a Magnetic Pickup mounted on the flywheel housing 
can be used for speed detection (). Rising oil pressure can also be used to disconnect the starter 
motor; however, it cannot be used for underspeed or overspeed detection. 
NOTE: - If the unit is configured for CAN Bus, speed sensing is via CAN Bus.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
After the starter motor has disengaged, the Safety On timer is activated, allowing Oil Pressure, High 
Engine Temperature, Under-speed, Charge Fail and any delayed Auxiliary fault inputs to stabilise 
without triggering the fault. 
Once the engine is running, the Warm Up timer, if selected is initiated, allowing the engine to stabilise 
before accepting the load. 
NOTE: - A load transfer will not be initiated until the Oil Pressure has risen. This prevents excessive 
78 
wear on the engine. 
The Generator will first be instructed to synchronise with the mains supply before closing the 
Generator Contact/Breaker and transferring load from mains to generator until the generator is 
supplying the required amount of power (adjustable using DSE Configuration Suite software). 
When the supplies have been in parallel for the duration of the parallel run time, the load will ramp off 
the mains supply and onto the generator. The Mains Contactor/Breaker will be instructed to open. 
The generator will then supply the requirements of the load. 
When the remote start signal is removed, the Stop delay timer is initiated. Once it has expired, the set 
is synchronised and paralleled with the mains supply. 
The system remains in this condition until expiry of the Parallel run timer. Once this has expired, the 
module will ramp the remaining load from the generator to mains supply. 
Alternative Ramping Scheme- The controller holds the power until the end of the Parallel run timer 
before initiating any ramping off. 
The Generator Contact/Breaker will open and the Cooling timer is then initiated, allowing the engine 
a cooling down period off load before shutting down. 
Once the Cooling timer expires, the Fuel Solenoid is de-energised, bringing the generator to a stop. 
NOTE: - Synchronising can be disabled if the application does not require this function. Contact your 
generating set supplier in the first instance for further details. 
NOTE: - The internal ‘Scheduler’ can be configured to operate the system in the same manner as 
described for the Remote start input. Please refer to the 86xx Configuration Software manuals for full 
details on the feature.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
79 
6.5.3 REMOTE START ON LOAD 
This mode of operation is used to start the set in response to rising load levels on the mains supply (if 
configured). 
NOTE: - If a digital input configured to panel lock is active, changing module modes will not be 
possible. Viewing the instruments and event log are NOT affected by panel lock. If panel lock is active 
the Panel lock indicator (if configured) illuminates. 
This mode is activated by pressing the pushbutton. An LED indicator beside the button will 
illuminate to confirm this operation. 
Should the load level on the mains supply exceed a pre-set level the module will initiate a start 
sequence. 
To allow for short duration load surges, the Start Delay timer is initiated. After this delay, if the pre-heat 
output option is selected then the pre-heat timer is initiated and the corresponding auxiliary output 
(if configured) will energise. 
NOTE: - If the load level returns below the pre-set level during the Start Delay timer, the unit will 
return to a stand-by state. 
After the above delays, the Fuel Solenoid (or enable ECU output if configured) is energised, and then 
one second later, the Starter Motor is engaged. 
NOTE: - If the unit has been configured for CAN Bus, compatible ECU’s will receive the start command 
via CAN Bus. Refer to the Manual CAN and DSE Wiring. Part No. 057-004 for more information on utilising 
DSE modules with electronically controlled engines. 
The engine is cranked for a pre-set time. If the engine fails to fire during this cranking attempt then the 
starter motor is disengaged for the pre-set rest period. Should this sequence continue beyond the set 
number of attempts, the start sequence will be terminated and Fail to Start fault will be displayed. 
Alarm 
Shutdown 
Fail to start 
When the engine fires, the starter motor is disengaged and locked out at a pre-set frequency 
measured from the alternator output. Alternatively, a Magnetic Pickup mounted on the flywheel housing 
can be used for speed detection (This is selected by PC using the DSE configuration Suite software). 
Rising oil pressure can also be used to disconnect the starter motor; however, it cannot be used for 
underspeed or overspeed detection. 
NOTE: - If the unit is configured for CAN Bus, speed sensing is via CAN Bus.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
After the starter motor has disengaged, the Safety On timer is activated, allowing Oil Pressure, High 
Engine Temperature, Under-speed, Charge Fail and any delayed Auxiliary fault inputs to stabilise 
without triggering the fault. 
Once the engine is running, the Warm Up timer, if selected is initiated, allowing the engine to stabilise 
before accepting the load. 
After the Warm-up timer has expired then the module will transfer the load from the mains supply to 
the generator output. It will observe the following sequence. 
The Generator will first be instructed to synchronise with the mains supply. Once these are matched, 
the Generator Contact/Breaker will be instructed to close. 
The load will then be ramped from the Mains to the appropriate level on the generator. 
The generator will then supply the requirements of the load. 
NOTE: - A load transfer will not be initiated until the Oil Pressure has risen. This prevents excessive 
80 
wear on the engine. 
Advanced Ramping Scheme - When configured the breaker closes and the Generator power is held until 
the end of the timer before ramping off 
When the remote start on load input is removed, the Stop delay timer is initiated. Once this timer has 
expired, the module will ramp the load from the generator to mains supply. The Generator 
Contact/Breaker will open and the Cooling timer is then initiated, allowing the engine a cooling down 
period off load before shutting down. Once the Cooling timer expires, the Fuel Solenoid is de-energised, 
bringing the generator to a stop. 
During the parallel run, the module can be configured to either run at a fixed level output, or to maintain 
an output in relation to the load level on the mains. 
NOTE: - When synchronising is enabled, the mains supply is checked before closing any load switching 
device. If the supply is live, synchronising will take place before any closure takes place. 
NOTE: - Synchronising can be disabled if the application does not require this function. Contact your 
genset supplier in the first instance for further details. 
NOTE: - The load level mode of operation relies on a Current Transformer (CT) fitted to the mains feed 
of the system. This is then used for measurement of the mains current used in the load level calculations.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
81 
6.6 MANUAL OPERATION 
Manual mode is used to allow the operator to control the operation of the generator, and to provide 
fault finding and diagnostic testing of the various operations normally performed during Automatic mode 
operation. 
NOTE: - If a digital input configured to panel lock is active, changing module modes will not be 
possible. Viewing the instruments and event logs and event log is NOT affected by panel lock. If 
panel lock is active the Panel lock indicator (if configured) illuminates. 
MANUAL, mode is selected by pressing the pushbutton. An LED besides the button will 
illuminate to confirm this operation. When the button is operated, the module will initiate the start 
sequence. 
NOTE: - There is no Start Delay in this mode of operation. 
If the pre-heat output option has been selected, this timer will be initiated and the auxiliary output 
selected energised. 
After the above delay, the Fuel Solenoid (or ECU output if configured) is energised, and then one 
second later, the Starter Motor is engaged. 
NOTE:- If the unit is configured for CAN Bus, compatible ECU’s will receive the start command via CAN 
Bus. Refer to the Manual CAN and DSE Wiring. Part No. 057-004 for more information on utilising DSE 
modules with electronically controlled engines. 
The engine is cranked for a pre-set time. If the engine fails to fire during this cranking attempt then the 
starter motor is disengaged for the pre-set rest period. Should this sequence continue beyond the set 
number of attempts, the start sequence will be terminated and Fail to Start will be displayed. 
Alarm 
Shutdown 
Fail to start 
When the engine fires, the starter motor is disengaged and locked out at a pre-set frequency 
measured from the Alternator output. Alternatively, a Magnetic Pickup mounted on the flywheel housing 
can be used for speed detection (This is selected by PC using the 5xxx series configuration software). 
Rising oil pressure can also be used to disconnect the starter motor; however, it cannot be used for 
underspeed or overspeed detection. 
NOTE: - If the unit is configured for CAN Bus, speed sensing is via CAN Bus. 
After the starter motor has disengaged, the Safety On timer is activated, allowing Oil Pressure, High 
Engine Temperature, Under-speed, Charge Fail and any delayed Auxiliary fault inputs to stabilise 
without triggering the fault. 
Once the engine is running, the Warm Up timer (if selected) is initiated, allowing the engine to stabilise 
before it can be loaded. Once the warm up timer has expired, the generator is then available to go on 
load and the Generator Available LED will illuminate on the front panel.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
82 
The generator will run off load unless: 
1. The mains supply fails, 
2. A Remote Start on load signal is applied, or an on-load run is configured in the scheduler. 
3. The Close Generator button is pressed. 
If any of the above signals are received, the generator is synchronised and paralleled with the mains 
supply (if available). 
During the parallel run, the module can be configured to either run at a fixed level output, or to maintain 
an output in relation to the load level on the mains. For full details of these mode please refer to the 
manual ‘The Guide to sync and load share Pt1’ 
Parallel operation: 
· If the Close Generator button is pressed again while in parallel, then the module will transfer 
the load fully to the generators, removing the load from the mains supply. This will be achieved by 
ramping the load from the parallel operating level to the generator. The Mains Contactor/Breaker 
will then be opened. Pressing the Close Mains button will cause the module to re-synchronise 
the generator with the mains supply and then return to parallel operation. 
· If the Close Mains button is pressed while in parallel, the module will open the generator load 
switching device, transferring the load fully to the mains supply. 
If Auto mode is selected and the mains supply is healthy, and the remote start on load signal not 
active, and the scheduler is not calling for a run, then the Return Delay Timer will start. 
Once this has expired then the module will exit parallel operation and will ramp the load back to the 
mains supply. It will then open the Generator Contactor/Breaker. The generator will then run off load 
allowing the engine a cooling period. 
Selecting STOP (O) de-energises the FUEL SOLENOID, bringing the generator to a stop. 
WARNING: - Operation of the STOP button in any mode will stop the generator operation and return 
the load switching system to a safe state. This operation may lead to loss of supply to the load. It is 
recommended that the STOP button is only operated once the generator is OFF LOAD and the mains is 
supplying the load. 
NOTE: - Synchronising can be disabled if the application does not require this function. Contact your 
genset supplier in the first instance for further details. If synchronising is disabled the system will always 
perform an open transition when switching the load from the mains to the generator or when returning to 
the mains. The parallel run stages of the sequence are not used when operating in this way. 
NOTE: - When synchronising is enabled, the mains supply is checked before closing any load switching 
device. If the supply is live, synchronising will take place before any closure takes place.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
83 
6.7 TEST OPERATION 
Test operation is used to perform a full on load test sequence to allow for diagnosis of faults. 
Alternatively, it may also be used to provide continuity of supply during expected black out events, peak 
lopping or peak shaving during high tariff periods. 
NOTE: - If a digital input configured to panel lock is active, changing module modes will not be 
possible. Viewing the instruments and event log is NOT affected by panel lock. If panel lock is active 
the Panel lock indicator (if configured) illuminates. 
TEST mode is initiated by pressing the pushbutton. An LED besides the button will illuminate to 
confirm this operation. When the START button is operated, the module will initiate the start 
sequence. 
NOTE: - There is no Start Delay in this mode of operation. 
If the pre-heat output option has been selected, this timer will initiate and the auxiliary output selected 
will be energised. 
After the above delay, the Fuel Solenoid (or ECU output if configured) is energised, and then one 
second later, the Starter Motor is engaged. 
NOTE: - If the unit has been configured for CAN Bus, compatible ECU’s will receive the start command 
via CAN Bus. Refer to the Manual CAN and DSE Wiring. Part No. 057-004 for more information on utilising 
DSE modules with electronically controlled engines. 
The engine is cranked for a pre-set time. If the engine fails to fire during this cranking attempt then the 
starter motor is disengaged for the pre-set rest period. Should this sequence continue beyond the set 
number of attempts, the start sequence will be terminated and Fail to Start will be displayed. 
Alarm 
Shutdown 
Fail to start 
When the engine fires, the starter motor is disengaged and locked out at a pre-set frequency from the 
Alternator output. Alternatively, a Magnetic Pickup mounted on the flywheel housing can be used for 
speed detection (This is selected by PC using the DSE Configuration Suite software). Rising oil 
pressure can also be used to disconnect the starter motor; however, it cannot be used for underspeed 
or overspeed detection. 
NOTE: - If the unit has been configured for CAN Bus speed sensing is via CAN Bus. 
After the starter motor has disengaged, the Safety On timer is activated, allowing Oil Pressure, High 
Engine Temperature, Under-speed, Charge Fail and any delayed Auxiliary fault inputs to stabilise 
without triggering the fault.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
Once the engine is running, the Warm Up timer, if selected is initiated, allowing the engine to stabilise 
before accepting the load. 
After the Warm-up timer has expired then the module will transfer the load from the mains supply to 
the generator output. It will observe the following sequence. 
The Generator will first be instructed to synchronise with the mains supply. Once these are matched 
the Generator Contact/Breaker will be instructed to close. 
The load will then be ramped from the Mains to the appropriate level on the generator. 
It will remain in this state whilst in the TEST mode unless the configuration (Advanced Options-Test 
mode) is configured for Run Mode=Island mode. 
If the module has an active remote start in island mode input or the internal scheduler has been 
configured for island mode then the parallel run time will activate. When this expires, the load will 
ramp off the mains supply and onto the generator. The Mains Contactor/Breaker will be instructed to 
open 
The generator will then supply the requirements of the load. 
NOTE:-A load transfer will not be initiated until the Oil Pressure has risen. This prevents excessive 
84 
wear on the engine. 
The system will then remain in this mode of operation until a different mode is selected. It is 
recommended that mode is used to cancel the TEST mode. 
When mode is selected the Stop delay timer is initiated. Once it has expired, the set is 
synchronised and paralleled with the mains supply. The system remains in this condition until expiry of 
the Parallel run timer. Once this has expired the module will ramp the remaining load from the 
generator to mains supply. The Generator Contact/Breaker will open and the Cooling timer is then 
initiated, allowing the engine a cooling down period off load before shutting down. Once the Cooling 
timer expires the Fuel Solenoid is de-energised, bringing the generator to a stop. 
During the parallel run the module can be configured to either run at a fixed level output, or to maintain 
an output in relation to the load level on the mains. For full details of these mode please refer to the 
manual ‘The Guide to sync and load share Pt1’ 
NOTE:- When synchronising is enabled, the mains supply is checked before closing any load switching 
device. If the supply is live, synchronising will take place before any closure takes place. 
NOTE:- Synchronising can be disabled if the application does not require this function. Contact your 
genset supplier in the first instance for further details.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
Number of present alarms. This is alarm 1 of a 
total of 2 present alarms 
85 
7 PROTECTIONS 
When an alarm is present, the Audible Alarm will sound and the Common alarm LED if configured will 
illuminate. 
The audible alarm can be silenced by pressing the Mute button 
The LCD display will jump from the ‘Information page’ to display the Alarm Page 
Alarm 1/2 
Warning 
Low oil pressure 
The LCD will display multiple alarms E.g. “High Engine Temperature shutdown”, “Emergency Stop” and 
“Low Coolant Warning”. These will automatically scroll in the order that they occurred. 
In the event of a warning alarm, the LCD will display the appropriate text. If a shutdown then occurs, 
the module will again display the appropriate text. 
Example:- 
Alarm 1/2 
Warning 
Oil pressure Low 
Alarm 2/2 
Shutdown 
Coolant Temperature High 
The type of alarm. E.g. Shutdown or warning 
The nature of alarm, e.g. Low oil pressure
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
86 
7.1 PROTECTIONS DISABLED 
User configuration is possible to prevent Shutdown / Electrical Trip alarms from stopping the engine. 
Under such conditions, Protections Disabled will appear on the module display to inform the operator of 
this status. 
This feature is provided to assist the system designer in meeting specifications for “Warning only”, 
“Protections Disabled”, “Run to Destruction”, “War mode” or other similar wording. 
When configuring this feature in the PC software, the system designer chooses to make the feature 
either permanently active, or only active upon operation of an external switch. The system designer 
provides this switch (not DSE) so its location will vary depending upon manufacturer, however it 
normally takes the form of a key operated switch to prevent inadvertent activation. Depending upon 
configuration, a warning alarm may be generated when the switch is operated. 
The feature is configurable in the PC configuration software for the module. Writing a configuration to 
the controller that has “Protections Disabled” configured, results in a warning message appearing on 
the PC screen for the user to acknowledge before the controller’s configuration is changed. This 
prevents inadvertent activation of the feature. 
7.1.1 INDICATION / WARNING ALARMS 
Under Indication or Warning alarms: 
· The module operation is unaffected by the Protections Disabled feature. See sections entitled 
Indications and Warnings elsewhere in this document. 
7.1.2 SHUTDOWN / ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARMS 
NOTE:- The EMERGENCY STOP input and shutdown alarm continues to operate even 
when Protections Disabled has been activated. 
Under Shutdown or Electrical Trip alarm conditions (excluding Emergency Stop): 
· The alarm is displayed on the screen as detailed in the section entitled Shutdown alarms 
elsewhere in this document. 
· The set continues to run. 
· The load switch maintains its current position (it is not opened if already closed) 
· Shutdown Blocked also appears on the LCD screen to inform the operator that the 
Protections Disabled feature has blocked the shutdown of the engine under the normally critical 
fault. 
· The ‘shutdown’ alarm is logged by the controllers Event Log (if configured to log shutdown 
alarms) and logs that the Shutdown was prevented.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
Display Reason 
CAN ECU WARNING The engine ECU has detected a warning alarm and has informed the DSE module 
of this situation. The exact error is also indicated on the module’s display and action 
taken depending upon the setting for the DM1 signals 
ECU SHUTDOWN The engine ECU has detected a shutdown alarm and has informed the DSE module 
of this situation. The exact error is also indicated on the module’s display. 
ECU DATA FAIL The module is configured for CAN operation and does not detect data on the engine 
CAN datalink, the engine shuts down. 
87 
7.1.3 CAN ALARMS 
NOTE:- Please refer to the engine manufacturer’s documentation for Can error message 
information. 
CAN alarms are messages sent from the CAN ECU to the DSE controller and displayed as follows in 
the below tables. 
DM1 Signals. Messages from the CAN ECU that are configurable within the DSE module for:- 
Warning, Electrical Trip, shutdown or None 
Display Reason 
Amber Warning The CAN ECU has detected a Amber warning. 
Red Shutdown The CAN ECU has detected a Red Shutdown. 
Malfunction The CAN ECU has detected a Malfunction message. 
Protect The CAN ECU has detected a Protect message 
Advanced CAN alarms Allows configuration of additional can messages from the engine ECU. 
Display Reason 
Water in Fuel The ECU has detected water in the fuel action taken is set by settings in advanced. 
After Treatment The ECU has detected “After Treatment alarm” consult engine manufacturer for 
details” action taken by DSE controller is set by settings in advanced 
NOTE:- For CAN ECU error code meanings, refer to the ECU documentation provided by 
the engine manufacturer, or contact the engine manufacturer for further assistance.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
88 
7.2 INDICATIONS 
Indications are non-critical and often status conditions. They do not appear on the LCD of the module 
as a text message. However, an output or LED indicator can be configured to draw the operator’s 
attention to the event. 
Example 
· Input configured for 
indication. 
· The LCD text will not 
appear on the module 
display but can be added 
in the configuration to 
remind the system 
designer what the input is 
used for. 
· As the input is configured 
to Indication there is no 
alarm generated. 
· LED Indicator to make 
LED1 illuminate when 
Digital Input A is active. 
· The Insert Card Text 
allows the system 
designer to print an insert 
card detailing the LED 
function. 
· Sample showing operation 
of the LED.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
89 
7.3 WARNINGS 
Warnings are non-critical alarm conditions and do not affect the operation of the generator system, 
they serve to draw the operators attention to an undesirable condition. 
Example 
Alarm 1/1 
Charge Failure 
Warning 
In the event of an alarm the LCD will jump to the alarms page, and scroll through all active warnings 
and shutdowns. 
By default, warning alarms are self-resetting when the fault condition is removed. However enabling ‘all 
warnings are latched’ will cause warning alarms to latch until reset manually. This is enabled using the 
8600 series configuration suite in conjunction with a compatible PC. 
Display Reason 
AUXILIARY INPUTS If an auxiliary input has been configured as a warning the appropriate LCD 
message will be displayed and the COMMON ALARM LED will illuminate. 
CHARGE FAILURE The auxiliary charge alternator voltage is low as measured from the W/L terminal. 
BATTERY UNDER 
VOLTAGE 
The DC supply has fallen below the low volts setting level for the duration of the low 
battery volts timer 
BATTERY OVER VOLTAGE The DC supply has risen above the high volts setting level for the duration of the 
high battery volts timer 
FAIL TO STOP The module has detected a condition that indicates that the engine is running when 
it has been instructed to stop. 
NOTE:- ‘Fail to Stop’ could indicate a faulty oil pressure sensor or switch - If the 
engine is at rest check oil sensor wiring and configuration. 
FUEL USAGE Indicates the amount of fuel measured by the fuel level sensor is in excess of the 
Fuel Usage alarm settings. This often indicates a fuel leak or potential fuel theft. 
FAILED TO SYNCHRONISE, if the module cannot synchronise within the time allowed by the Synchronising timer 
a warning is initiated. The LCD will indicate ‘FAILED TO SYNC’ and the COMMON 
ALARM LED will illuminate 
AUXILIARY INPUTS Auxiliary inputs can be user configured and will display the message as written by 
the user. 
LOW FUEL LEVEL The level detected by the fuel level sensor is below the low fuel level setting. 
CAN ECU ERROR The engine ECU has detected a warning alarm and has informed the DSE module 
of this situation. The exact error is also indicated on the module’s display. 
kW OVERLOAD The measured Total kW is above the setting of the kW overload warning alarm 
EARTH FAULT The measured Earth Fault Current has been in excess of the earth fault trip and has 
surpassed the IDMT curve of the Earth Fault alarm. 
NEGATIVE PHASE 
SEQUENCE 
Indicates ‘out of balance’ current loading of the generator. 
Sometimes also called Negative Sequence Current or Symmetry Fault 
MAINTENANCE DUE Indicates that the maintenance alarm has triggered. A visit is required by the 
Generator service company. 
MAINS REVERSE POWER if the 8620 detects that the generator is exporting more than the configured limit, 
the LCD will indicate ‘MAINS REVERSE POWER’ and the COMMON ALARM LED 
will flash 
LOADING VOLTAGE NOT 
REACHED 
Indicates that the generator voltage is not above the configured loading voltage. 
The generator will not take load when the alarm is present after the safety timer. 
LOADING FREQUENCY Indicates that the generator frequency is not above the configured loading
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
NOT REACHED frequency. The generator will not take load when the alarm is present after the 
90 
safety timer. 
PROTECTIONS DISABLED Shutdown and electrical trip alarms can be disabled by user configuration. In this 
case, Protections Disabled will appear on the module display; The alarm text is 
displayed but the engine will continue to run. This is ‘logged’ by the module to 
allow DSE Technical Staff to check if the protections have been disabled on the 
module at any time. This feature is available from V4 onwards. 
LOW OIL PRESSURE The module detects that the engine oil pressure has fallen below the low oil 
pressure pre-alarm setting level after the Safety On timer has expired. 
ENGINE HIGH TEMPERATURE The module detects that the engine coolant temperature has exceeded the high 
engine temperature pre-alarm setting level after the Safety On timer has expired. 
ENGINE LOW TEMPERATURE The module detects that the engine coolant temperature has fallen below the 
high engine temperature pre-alarm setting level. 
OVERSPEED The engine speed has risen above the overspeed pre alarm setting 
UNDERSPEED The engine speed has fallen below the underspeed pre alarm setting 
GENERATOR OVER 
FREQUENCY 
The generator output frequency has risen above the pre-set pre-alarm setting. 
GENERATOR UNDER 
FREQUENCY 
The generator output frequency has fallen below the pre-set pre-alarm setting 
after the Safety On timer has expired. 
GENERATOR OVER VOLTAGE The generator output voltage has risen above the pre-set pre-alarm setting. 
GENERATOR UNDER 
VOLTAGE 
The generator output voltage has fallen below the pre-set pre-alarm setting after 
the Safety On timer has expired. 
INSUFFICIENT CAPACITY f the generator reach full load when they are in parallel with the mains (utility). 
The LCD will indicate ‘INSUFFICIENT CAPACITY’ and the COMMON ALARM 
LED will illuminate. 
MAINS FAILED TO CLOSE If the mains breaker fails to close, a warning is initiated. The LCD will indicate 
‘MAINS FAILED TO CLOSE’ and the COMMON ALARM LED will illuminate. 
MAINS FAILED TO OPEN 
If the mains breaker fails to open, a warning is initiated. The LCD will indicate 
‘MAINS FAILED TO OPEN’ and the COMMON ALARM LED will illuminate. 
ECU WARNING The engine ECU has detected a warning alarm and has informed the DSE 
module of this situation. The exact error is also indicated on the module’s display. 
If the module is configured for, CAN and receives an “error” message from the engine control unit, ‘Can 
ECU Warning” is shown on the module’s display and a warning alarm is generated. 
7.4 HIGH CURRENT WARNING ALARM 
GENERATOR HIGH CURRENT, if the module detects a generator output current in excess of the pre-set 
trip a warning alarm initiates. The module shows Alarm Warning High Current. If this high current 
condition continues for an excess period, then the alarm escalates to a shutdown condition. For further 
details of the high current alarm, please see High Current Shutdown Alarm. 
By default, High Current Warning Alarm is self-resetting when the overcurrent condition is removed. 
However enabling ‘all warnings are latched’ will cause the alarm to latch until reset manually. This is 
enabled using the 8600 series configuration suite in conjunction with a compatible PC.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
91 
7.5 SHUTDOWNS 
NOTE:- Shutdown and Electrical Trip alarms can be disabled by user configuration. See 
the section entitled Protections Disabled elsewhere in this document. 
Shutdowns are latching alarms and stop the Generator. Clear the alarm and remove the fault then 
press Stop/Reset to reset the module. 
Example 
Alarm 1/1 
Oil Pressure Low 
Shutdown 
NOTE:- The alarm condition must be rectified before a reset will take place. If the alarm 
condition remains, it will not be possible to reset the unit (The exception to this is the Low Oil 
Pressure alarm and similar ‘active from safety on’ alarms, as the oil pressure will be low with 
the engine at rest). 
Display Reason 
EARTH FAULT The measured Earth Fault Current has been in excess of the earth 
fault trip and has surpassed the IDMT curve of the Earth Fault 
alarm. 
FAIL TO START The engine has not fired after the preset number of start attempts 
EMERGENCY STOP The emergency stop button has been depressed. This a failsafe 
(normally closed to battery positive) input and will immediately stop 
the set should the signal be removed. 
Removal of the battery positive supply from the emergency stop 
input will also remove DC supply from the Fuel and Start outputs of 
the controller. 
NOTE:- The Emergency Stop Positive signal must be 
present otherwise the unit will shutdown. 
LOW OIL PRESSURE The engine oil pressure has fallen below the low oil pressure trip 
setting level after the Safety On timer has expired. 
ENGINE HIGH TEMPERATURE The engine coolant temperature has exceeded the high engine 
temperature trip setting level after the Safety On timer has expired. 
FUEL USAGE Indicates the amount of fuel measured by the fuel level sensor is in 
excess of the Fuel Usage alarm settings. This often indicates a fuel 
leak or potential fuel theft. 
PHASE ROTATION The phase rotation is measured as being different to the configured 
direction. 
OVERSPEED The engine speed has exceeded the pre-set trip 
NOTE:-During the start-up sequence, the overspeed trip 
logic can be configured to allow an extra trip level margin. This 
is used to prevent nuisance tripping on start-up - Refer to the 
8000 series configuration software manual under heading 
‘Overspeed Overshoot’ for details.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
UNDERSPEED The engine speed has fallen below the pre-set trip after the Safety 
On timer has expired. 
Display Reason 
GENERATOR OVER FREQUENCY The generator output frequency has risen above the preset level 
GENERATOR UNDER FREQUENCY The generator output frequency has fallen below the preset level 
GENERATOR OVER VOLTAGE The generator output voltage has risen above the preset level 
GENERATOR UNDER VOLTAGE The generator output voltage has fallen below the preset level 
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR OPEN 
The oil pressure sensor is detected as not being present (open 
CIRCUIT 
circuit) 
AUXILIARY INPUTS An active auxiliary input configured as a shutdown will cause the 
engine to shut down. The display shows the text as configured by 
the user. 
LOSS OF SPEED SIGNAL The speed signal from the magnetic pickup is not being received by 
the DSE controller. 
ECU DATA FAIL The module is configured for CAN operation and does not detect 
data on the engine Can datalink, the engine shuts down. 
ECU SHUTDOWN The engine ECU has detected a shutdown alarm and has informed 
the DSE module of this situation. The exact error is also indicated on 
the module’s display. 
kW OVERLOAD The measured Total kW is above the setting of the kW overload 
shutdown alarm 
92 
NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE 
(DSE7000 series V2.0 or above 
only) 
Indicates ‘out of balance’ current loading of the generator. 
Sometimes also called Negative Sequence Current or Symmetry 
Fault 
MAINTENANCE DUE 
(DSE7000 series V2.1 or above 
only) 
Indicates that the maintenance alarm has triggered. A visit is 
required by the Generator service company. 
GENERATOR HIGH CURRENT A High Current condition has continued for an excess period, then 
the alarm escalates to either a shutdown or electrical trip condition 
(depending upon module configuration). For further details of the 
high current alarm, please see High Current Shutdown / Electrical 
Trip Alarm. 
LOADING VOLTAGE NOT 
REACHED 
Indicates that the generator voltage is not above the configured 
loading voltage after the safety timer. The generator will shutdown. 
LOADING FREQUENCY NOT 
REACHED 
Indicates that the generator frequency is not above the configured 
loading frequency after the safety timer. The generator will 
shutdown. 
PROTECTIONS DISABLED Shutdown and electrical trip alarms can be disabled by user 
configuration. In this case, Protections Disabled will appear on the 
module display; The alarm text will be displayed but the engine will 
continue to run. This is ‘logged’ by the module to allow DSE 
Technical Staff to check if the protections have been disabled on the 
module at any time. This feature is available from V4 onwards.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
93 
7.6 ELECTRICAL TRIPS 
NOTE:- Shutdown and Electrical Trip alarms can be disabled by user configuration. See 
the section entitled Protections Disabled elsewhere in this document. 
Electrical trips are latching and stop the Generator but in a controlled manner. On initiation of the 
electrical trip condition the module will de-energise the ‘Close Generator’ Output to remove the load 
from the generator. Once this has occurred the module will start the Cooling timer and allow the engine 
to cool off-load before shutting down the engine. The alarm must be accepted and cleared, and the 
fault removed to reset the module. 
Example 
Alarm 1/1 
Generator Current High 
Electrical Trip 
Electrical trips are latching alarms and stop the Generator. Remove the fault then press Stop/Reset 
to reset the module. 
Display Reason 
GENERATOR HIGH CURRENT If a generator output in excess of the high current alarm point, a warning 
alarm occurs. If this high current condition continues for an excess period, 
then the alarm escalates to either a shutdown or electrical trip condition 
(depending upon module configuration). For further details of the high 
current alarm, please see High Current Shutdown / Electrical Trip Alarm. 
AUXILIARY INPUTS If an auxiliary input configured as an electrical trip is active, the user 
configured message shows on the display. 
kW OVERLOAD The measured Total kW is above the setting of the kW overload Electrical 
Trip alarm 
EARTH FAULT The measured Earth Current is above the setting of the Earth fault alarm. 
FAILED TO SYNCHRONISE If the module cannot synchronise within the time allowed by the 
Synchronising timer a warning is initiated. The LCD will indicate ‘FAILED 
TO SYNC’ and the COMMON ALARM LED will illuminate 
MAINS REVERSE POWER if the module detects a mains reverse power in excess of the pre-set trip 
level and time delay, an electrical trip is initiated. The LCD will indicate 
‘MAINS REVERSE POWER’ and the COMMON ALARM LED will flash. 
NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE Indicates ‘out of balance’ current loading of the generator. 
Sometimes also called Negative Sequence Current or Symmetry Fault 
FUEL USAGE Indicates the amount of fuel used is in excess of the Fuel Usage alarm 
settings. This often indicates a fuel leak or potential fuel theft. 
LOADING VOLTAGE NOT REACHED Indicates that the generator voltage is not above the configured loading 
voltage after the safety timer. The generator will shutdown. 
LOADING FREQUENCY NOT REACHED Indicates that the generator frequency is not above the configured loading 
frequency after the safety timer. The generator will shutdown. 
PROTECTIONS DISABLED Shutdown and electrical trip alarms is disabled by user configuration. In 
this case, Protections Disabled will appear on the module display; The 
alarm text is displayed but the engine will continue to run. This is ‘logged’ 
by the module to allow DSE Technical Staff to check if the protections 
have been disabled on the module at any time. This feature is available 
from V4 onwards. 
GENERATOR UNDER FREQUENCY The generator output frequency has fallen below the preset level
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
GENERATOR UNDER VOLTAGE The generator output voltage has fallen below the preset level 
INSUFFICIENT CAPACITY If the module is configured for Mains CT and the load levels are so high 
that the generator is unable to supply enough load to maintain the 
configured mains level, insufficient capacity will be displayed and the 
COMMON ALARM LED will flash. The generator will provide 100% of its 
capacity and the loading on the mains will increase. 
UNDERSPEED The engine speed has fallen below the underspeed setting 
7.7 HIGH CURRENT SHUTDOWN / ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARM 
The overcurrent alarm combines a simple warning trip level with a fully functioning IDMT curve for 
thermal protection. 
7.7.1 IMMEDIATE WARNING 
If the Immediate Warning is enabled, the DSE8600 Series controller generates a warning alarm as 
soon as the Trip level is reached. The alarm automatically resets once the generator loading current 
falls below the Trip level (unless All Warnings are latched is enabled). For further advice, consult your 
generator supplier. 
7.7.2 IDMT ALARM 
If the IDMT Alarm is enabled, the DSE8600 Series controller begins following the IDMT ‘curve’ when 
the trip level is passed. 
If the Trip is surpassed for an excess amount of time the IDMT Alarm triggers (Shutdown or Electric 
trip as selected in Action). 
High current shutdown is a latching alarm and stops the Generator. 
Remove the fault then press Stop/Reset to reset the module. 
High current electrical trip is a latching alarm and removes the generator from the load, before 
stopping the Generator after the off load cooling timer. 
Remove the fault then press Stop/Reset to reset the module. 
The higher the overload, the faster the trip. The speed of the trip is dependent upon the fixed formula: 
94 
T = t / ( ( IA / I T ) – 1 ) 2 
Where: T is the tripping time in seconds 
IA is the actual current of the most highly loaded line (L1 or L2 or L3) 
IT is the delayed over-current trip point 
t is the time multiplier setting and also represents the tripping time in seconds at twice full load (when IA / IT = 2).
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
Factory settings for the IDMT Alarm when used on a brushless alternator are as follows (screen 
capture from the DSE Configuration Suite PC software : 
These settings provide for normal running of the generator up to 100% full load. If full load is 
surpassed, the Immediate Warning alarm is triggered, the set continues to run. 
The effect of an overload on the generator is that the alternator windings begin to overheat; the aim of 
the IDMT alarm is to prevent the windings being overload (heated) too much. The amount of time that 
the set can be safely overloaded is governed by how high the overload condition is. 
With typical settings as above, the tripping curve is followed as shown below. 
This allows for overload of the set to the limits of the Typical Brushless Alternator whereby 110% 
overload is permitted for 1 hour. 
If the set load reduces, the controller then follows a cooling curve. This means that a second overload 
condition may trip much sooner than the first as the controller knows if the windings have not cooled 
sufficiently. 
For further details on the Thermal damage curve of your alternator, you are referred to your alternator 
manufacturer and generator supplier. 
95 
IT (Trip setting 
value) 
t (time multiplier)
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
7.8 EARTH FAULT SHUTDOWN / ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARM 
When the module is suitably connected using the ‘Earth Fault CT’. The module measures Earth Fault 
and can optionally be configured to generate an alarm condition (shutdown or electrical trip) when a 
specified level is surpassed. 
If the Earth Fault alarm is enabled, the controller begins following the IDMT ‘curve’. If the Trip is 
surpassed for an excess amount of time the Alarm triggers (Shutdown or Electric trip as selected in 
Action). 
The higher the Earth Fault, the faster the trip. The speed of the trip is dependent upon the fixed formula 
: 
96 
T = K x 0.14 / ( ( I / Is)0.02 -1 ) 
Where: T is the tripping time in seconds (accurate to +/- 5% or +/- 50ms (whichever is the greater) 
K is the time multiplier setting 
I is the actual earth current measured 
Is is the trip setting value 
IS (Trip setting value) 
K (time multiplier setting) 
The settings shown in the example above are a screen capture of the DSE factory settings, taken from 
the DSE Configuration Suite software. 
7.9 SHORT CIRCUIT ALARM 
If the Short Circuit alarm is enabled, the DSE8620 controller begins following the IDMT ‘curve’. If the 
Trip is surpassed for an excess amount of time the Alarm triggers (Shutdown or Electrical trip as 
selected in Action). 
The higher the Short Circuit, the faster the trip. The speed of the trip is dependent upon the fixed 
formula : 
T = K x 0.14 / ( ( I / Is)0.02 -1 ) 
Where: T is the tripping time in seconds (accurate to +/- 5% or +/- 50ms (whichever is the greater) 
K is the time multiplier setting 
I is the actual current measured 
Is is the trip setting value 
IS (Trip setting value) 
K (time multiplier setting) 
The settings shown in the example above are a screen capture of the DSE factory settings, taken from 
the DSE Configuration Suite software.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
97 
7.10 ROCOF / VECTOR SHIFT 
When configured to run in parallel with the mains (utility) supply, the module monitors for ROCOF / 
Vector shift trips according to the module’s configuration settings. This is included within the module 
and will detect failure of the mains supply during parallel operation with the generator. 
NOTE:- This protection operates only when in parallel with the mains supply and is disabled at all 
other times. 
Should either of these alarms operate, the module will perform either a controlled shutdown (electrical 
trip) of the generator or will instigate the mains failure function. This operation must be manually reset : 
1) Press button. The engine will stop if it is still running and the alarm is cleared. 
2) Activate digital input configured to “Clear ROCOF/Vector shift” if this has been provided. 
3) Press and button together and hold for 5 seconds. The ROCOF/Vector shift 
instrument is displayed and all ‘peak hold’ values are reset, clearing the ROCOF/Vector shift 
alarm. 
For details on activating and configuring the ROCOF/Vector shift protection you are referred to the 
DSE8620 software manual. 
7.10.1 MAINS DECOUPLING TEST MODE 
To aid the testing of the mains decoupling features in the controller, a special test mode is included. 
This is activated by placing the module into STOP mode and enabling the ‘test mode’ in the module’s 
front panel ‘running editor’, described elsewhere in this document. 
This allows a ‘one shot’ test of the mains decoupling protection, enabling the Test Engineer to inject the 
necessary test signals into the DSE control and timing the reaction from application of the signal to 
activation of a DSE output configured to ‘combined mains decoupling’. 
The actual testing of mains decoupling must be left to experienced engineers and is outside the scope 
of DSE support.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
98 
8 SCHEDULER 
DSE8600 Series contains an inbuilt exercise run scheduler, capable of automatically starting and 
stopping the set. Up to 16 scheduled start/stop sequences can be configured to repeat on a 7-day or 
28-day cycle. 
Scheduled runs may be on load or off load depending upon module configuration. 
Example 
Screen capture from DSE Configuration 
Suite Software showing the configuration of 
the Exercise Scheduler. 
In this example the set will start at 09:00 on 
Monday and run for 5 hours, then start at 
13:30 on Tuesday and run for 30 minutes. 
8.1.1 STOP MODE 
· Scheduled runs will not occur when the module is in STOP/RESET mode. 
8.1.2 MANUAL MODE 
· Scheduled runs will not occur when the module is in MANUAL mode. 
· Activation of a Scheduled Run ‘On Load’ when the module is operating OFF LOAD in Manual 
mode will have no effect, the set continues to run OFF LOAD 
8.1.3 AUTO MODE 
· Scheduled runs will operate ONLY if the module is in AUTO mode with no Shutdown or 
Electrical Trip alarm present. 
· If the module is in STOP or MANUAL mode when a scheduled run begins, the engine will not 
be started. However, if the module is moved into AUTO mode during a scheduled run, the 
engine will be called to start. 
· Depending upon configuration by the system designer, an external input can be used to inhibit a 
scheduled run. 
· If the engine is running OFF LOAD in AUTO mode and a scheduled run configured to ‘On Load’ 
begins, the set is placed ON LOAD for the duration of the Schedule.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
9 SYNCHROSCOPE OPERATION 
99 
Hz +2.9 V +0.2 
Initial stage of Synchronising display will only show 
the difference between the Mains Supply and the 
Generator Output. Here the display is showing a 
frequency mismatch of +2.9Hz - The genset 
frequency is too high (indicated by the arrow) and 
should be reduced. The voltage is +0.2 volts high, but 
is within the limits set for synchronising. 
Hz +0.9 V +0.2 
Once the difference between the Mains and the 
Generator frequency has been reduced, the 
‘Synchroscope’ display will become active. The 
moving bar will roll from one side to the other showing 
the phase of the two supplies. The area in the centre 
of the scope indicates the set limits for synchronising 
to occur. 
Hz -0.2 V +0.2 
Synchronising will only occur when both the 
Frequency and the voltage differences are within 
acceptable limits - Indicated by ‘Tick’ marks on the 
top of the display. Then the moving bar display will 
show the phase difference. The engine speed will be 
automatically adjusted, altering the phase, until the 
moving bar enters the centre of the scope. 
Hz -0.2 V +0.2 
Once the Mains and generator supplies are 
synchronised, the module will initiate a breaker close 
signal to load the generator onto the Mains. Should 
synchronism be broken the moving bar will pass out 
of the synchronising window. 
Note: - If the module display is showing the status page when the synchronising process begins, the 
module will automatically switch to the Synchroscope page. The ramp progress will also be displayed on 
the screen once paralleling has taken place.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
100 
10 COMMISSIONING 
10.1 COMMISSIONING SCREENS 
Commissioning screens are available to both aid the commissioning process and also to give additional 
information about the synchronising and load sharing process. 
These screens can be enabled and disabled in the module’s display editor. 
10.1.1 SCREEN 1 
L – L 0V kW 0.0 Average L-L Voltage and total kW 
Amps 0A kVAr 0.0 Load on the set(s) and total kVAr 
Pf ----- kW 0.0% Ramp level and % of full load kW 
Gov 0.0% Avr 0.0% Gov and Avr % of Drive 
10.1.2 SCREEN 2 
Tgt 0.0% kW 0.0% Target % and total kW 
Tgt 0.0% kVAr 0.0% Target % and total kVAr 
Pf ----- Ramp 5.0% Ramp level and % of full load kW 
Gov 0.0% Avr 0.0% Gov and Avr % of Drive 
10.1.3 SCREEN 3 
GL1 0A M L1 0A Generator L1 and Mains L1 
Pf ----- Pf ---- Generator Power factor and Mains Power factor 
kW 0.0 kW 0.0 Generator kW and Mains kW 
kVAr 0.0 kVAr 0.0 Generator kVAr and Mains kW 
10.1.4 SCREEN 4 
MTgt 0.0% kW 0.0% Mains Target and mains actual kW 
MTgt 00.0% kVAr 0.0% Mains Target and mains actual kW 
Pf ----- Ramp 5.0% Power factor Ramp rate 
Gov 0.0% Avr 0.0% Governor Avr 
NOTE:- Some of the items may be removed from the commissioning screens if they are not applicable 
to the module configuration.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
11 FRONT PANEL CONFIGURATION 
This configuration mode allows the operator limited customising of the way the module operates. 
Use the module’s navigation buttons to traverse the menu and make value changes to the parameters: 
Next page 
Accept 
101 
Previous page 
Increase value / next item 
Decrease value / next item
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
11.1 ACCESSING THE MAIN FRONT PANEL CONFIGURATION EDITOR 
Ensure the engine is at rest and the module is in STOP mode by pressing the Stop/Reset button. 
Press the Stop/Reset and Info buttons simultaneously. 
If a module security PIN has been set, the PIN number request is then shown : 
Press , the first ‘#’ changes to ‘0’. Press (up or down) to adjust it to the correct value. 
Press (right) when the first digit is correctly entered. The digit you have just entered will now show 
‘#’ for security. 
Repeat this process for the other digits of the PIN number. You can press (left) if you need to move 
back to adjust one of the previous digits. 
When is pressed after editing the final PIN digit, the PIN is checked for validity. If the number is not 
correct, you must re-enter the PIN. 
If the PIN has been successfully entered (or the module PIN has not been 
enabled), the editor is displayed : 
NOTE: The PIN number is not set by DSE when the module leaves the factory. If the module has a PIN 
code set, this has been affected by your generator supplier who should be contacted if you require the 
code. If the code has been ‘lost’ or ‘forgotten’, the module must be returned to the DSE factory to have 
the module’s code removed. A charge will be made for this procedure. 
NB - This procedure cannot be performed away from the DSE factory. 
102
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
103 
11.1.1 EDITING A PARAMETER 
Enter the editor as described above. 
Press the (left) or (right) buttons to cycle to the section you wish to view/change. 
Press the (up or down) buttons to select the parameter you wish to view/change within the 
currently selected section. 
To edit the parameter, press to enter edit mode. The parameter begins to flash to indicate that you are 
editing the value. 
Press the (up or down) buttons to change the parameter to the required value. 
Press to save the value. The parameter ceases flashing to indicate that it has been saved. 
To exit the editor at any time, press and hold the or button. 
NOTE: - The editor automatically exits after 5 minutes of inactivity to ensure security. 
NOTE: - The PIN number is automatically reset when the editor is exited (manually or 
automatically) to ensure security. 
NOTE: - More comprehensive module configuration is possible using the 86xx series PC 
configuration software. Please contact us for further details.
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
104 
11.2 ADJUSTABLE PARAMETERS 
Front Panel Configuration Editor. For descriptions of the parameters, you are referred to The DSE8600 
series Configuration Suite Manual, DSE Part 057-119. 
Section Parameter as shown on display Values 
Display Contrast 53% 
Language English, others. 
Current Date and Time hh:mm 
Timers LCD Page Timer 5m 
Scroll Delay 2s 
Engine Pre Heat Timer 0s 
Engine Crank Duration 10s 
Engine Crank Rest Time 10s 
Engine Safety On Delay 10s 
Engine Smoke Limiting 0s 
Engine Smoke Limiting Off 0s 
Engine Warm Up Time 0s 
Engine Cool Down Time 1m 
Engine Speed Overshoot Delay 0s 
Engine Failed To Stop 30s 
Battery Under Voltage Warning Delay 1m 
Battery Over Voltage Warning Delay 1m 
Return Delay 30s 
Generator Transient Delay 0s 
Mains 
Mains Transient Delay 2s 
Mains transfer time 0.7s 
Mains Under Voltage Alarm 184V 
Mains Over Voltage Alarm 277V 
Mains Under Frequency Alarm 45Hz 
Mains over Frequency Alarm 55Hz 
Mains Transient Delay 2s 
CT Primary 600A 
CT Secondary 5A 
Mains KW Rating 345kW 
Mains KVar Rating 258kW 
Generator Under Voltage Shutdown 184v 
Under Voltage Pre-Alarm 196v 
Nominal Voltage 230v 
Over Voltage Pre-Alarm 265v 
Over Voltage Shutdown 277v 
Under Frequency Shutdown 40Hz 
Under Frequency Pre-Alarm 42Hz 
Nominal frequency 50Hz 
Over Frequency Pre-Alarm 54Hz 
Over Frequency Shutdown 57Hz 
Full Load Rating 500A 
kW Overload Trip 100% 
Delayed Over current Active 
Delayed Over Current 100% 
AC System 3 Phase 4 Wire 
CT Primary 600A Power Cycle After Exit 
CT Secondary 5A Power Cycle After Exit 
Short Circuit Trip 200% 
Earth CT Primary 500A 
Earth Fault Trip Active 
Earth Fault Trip 10% 
Transient Delay 0s 
Gen Reverse Power Delay 2s 
Full kW rating 345kW 
Full kVAr rating 258kVAr 
Load Ramp Rate 3% 
Gen Reverse Power 35kW 
Insufficient Capacity Delay 1s 
Insufficient Capacity action None 
Reactive Load CTL mode VAr fixed export 
Load Parallel Power 50% 
Load Power Factor 1.00pf 0 KVAr 0% 
Engine Oil Pressure Low shutdown 1.03bar 
Oil Pressure Low Pre-Alarm 1.24bar 
Coolant Temp High Pre-Alarm 90ºC 
Coolant Temp High Electrical Trip 92ºC (When Enabled) 
Coolant Temp High Shutdown 95ºC 
Start Delay Off load 5s 
Start Delay on load 5s 
Start Delay Telemetry 5s 
Pre Heat Timer 0s 
Crank Duration 10s 
Crank rest Time 10s 
Safety On Delay 10s 
Smoke Limiting 0s 
Smoke limiting off 0s 
Warm Up Time 0s 
Cool Down Time 1m 
Speed Overshoot Delay 0s 
Speed Overshoot 0% 
Fail To Stop Delay 30s 
Battery Under Volts Warning Active 
Battery Under Volts Warning Delay 1m 
Charge Alternator Failure Shutdown 5s (When Enabled) 
Charge Alternator Failure Shutdown Active, Inactive. Electronic engines only when droop is enabled. 
Charge Alternator Shutdown Delay Active, Inactive 
Droop % Active , Inactive (Only Available When Scheduler Is Active) 
Scheduler 
Scheduler Weekly, Monthly (Only Available When Scheduler Is Active) 
Schedule On Load 
Active , Inactive (Only Available When Scheduler Is 
Active) 
Schedule Period 
Weekly, Monthly (Only Available When Scheduler Is 
Active)
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
Schedule Time & Date Selection (1-16) Press to begin editing then or when 
105 
selecting the different parameters in the scheduler. 
11.3 ACCESSING THE ‘RUNNING’ CONFIGURATION EDITOR 
The ‘running’ editor can be entered while the engine is running. All protections remain active if the 
engine is running while the running editor is entered. 
Press and hold the button to enter the running editor. 
11.3.1 EDITING A PARAMETER 
Enter the editor as described above. 
Press the (left) or (right) buttons to cycle to the section you wish to 
view/change. 
Press the (up or down) buttons to select the parameter you wish to 
view/change within the currently selected section. 
To edit the parameter, press to enter edit mode. The parameter begins to flash to 
indicate that you are editing the value. 
Press the (up or down) buttons to change the parameter to the required 
value. 
Press to save the value. The parameter ceases flashing to indicate that it has 
been saved. 
To exit the editor at any time, press and hold the button. 
11.3.2 ADJUSTABLE PARAMETERS (RUNNING EDITOR) 
Running Editor (Factory default settings are shown in bold italicised text) 
Section Parameter as shown on display Factory Setting 
DISPLAY Contrast 53% 
Language English 
) 
Load Demand priority (1) 
Load Power factor 0-100% (0) 
Load parallel power 0-100% (50) 
Enable commissioning screens Inactive, Active 
Override starting alarms Inactive, Active 
Voltage adjust (manual mode only engine running breaker open) 0-100 % (0) 
Frequency adjust (manual mode only engine running breaker open) 0-100 % (0) 
Enable mains decoupling test mode (Stop mode only) Inactive Active
DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 
106 
12 FAULT FINDING 
SYMPTOM POSSIBLE REMEDY 
Unit is inoperative Check the battery and wiring to the unit. Check the DC 
supply. Check the DC fuse. 
Unit shuts down Check DC supply voltage is not above 35 Volts or below 9 
Volts when the module is operating. Run the system 
through a complete test and check the voltage remains 
within these limits consistently. 
Check the operating temperature is not above 70°C. Check 
the DC fuse. 
Warning fault operates Check relevant switch and wiring of fault indicated on LCD 
display. Check configuration of input. 
Continuous starting of generators 
when in AUTO 
Check that there is no signal present on the “Remote Start” 
input. Check configured polarity is correct. Check that the 
mains supply is within limits and load level on the mains is 
not above the configured level for mains “import/export”. 
NOTE: - The above fault finding is provided as a guide check-list only. As it is possible for the module 
to be configured to provide a wide range of different features always, refer to the source of your module 
configuration if in doubt.
12.1.1 EARTH FAULT TRIPPING CURVES 
NOTE: DSE Factory setting is time multiplier (K) = 0.4 
DSE8620 Operating Manual Issue 1
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
12.1.2 SHORT CIRCUIT TRIPPING CURVES 
NOTE: DSE Factory setting is time multiplier (K) = 0.01 
108 
Trip time 
(mS) 
Multiple of trip point setting
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
12.2 COMMUNICATIONS OPTION 
12.2.1 DESCRIPTION 
The 86xx series configuration software allows the 8620 controller to communicate with a PC. The computer can 
be connected to the module either directly, via a modem (RS232) or via an RS485 link. 
The operator is then able to remotely control the module, starting or stopping the generator, selecting operating 
modes, etc. The various operating parameters (such as output volts, oil pressure, etc.) on the remote 
generator can also be viewed. 
The information contained in this manual should be read in conjunction with the appropriate module 
documentation. This manual only details the operation of the communications software and how it should be 
used. The operation of the module is detailed in its own relevant manual. 
12.2.2 CONTROLLER TO PC (DIRECT) CONNECTION 
To connect a 8620 to a modem the following items are required: - 
· Any 8620 Module 
· DSE Configuration Suite software (Available from the www.deepseaplc.com Website). 
109
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
110 
12.2.3 MODBUS 
The RS485 output uses Modbus communications protocol. This uses a master-slave technique to 
communicate. Only the Master can initiate a packet transaction, called a ‘query’. When appropriate the slave 
(8620 Module) responds to the query and provides the information requested by the master. 
All supported data can be read and written as specified in the register table (documentation is available from 
Deep Sea Electronics Plc.). 
When the 8620 Module receives a query it will respond by either supplying the requested register data or 
performing the requested action. A slave device (the 8620 module) will never initiate communications on the 
Modbus™ link. The 8620 can only be configured as a slave device. The Master can only query individual 
slaves. Refer to the Modbus™ protocol document for more details. 
12.3 IEEE C37.2 STANDARD ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM FUNCTION NUMBERS 
The DSE 8620 contains many protection devices and functions, which are listed in detail in the following 
sections. 
Functions and protections provided corresponding to IEEE C37.2 (1996) system device numbers are listed 
below. 
. 
Overall the 8620 is designated as 11 - Multifunction device and includes the following protections and 
functions: 
Device Description 
2 
time delay starting 
or closing relay 
A device that functions to give a desired amount of time delay before or 
after any point of operation in a switching sequence or protective relay 
system, except as specifically provided by device functions 48, 62, 79, and 
82. 
3 
checking or 
interlocking relay 
A device that operates in response to the position of one or more other 
devices or predetermined conditions in a piece of equipment or circuit, to 
allow an operating sequence to proceed, or to stop, or to provide a check 
of the position of these devices or conditions for any purpose. 
5 stopping device 
A control device used primarily to shut down equipment and hold it out of 
operation. (This device may be manually or electrically actuated, but it 
excludes the function of electrical lockout [see device function 86] on 
abnormal conditions.) 
12 overspeed device A device, usually direct connected, that operates on machine overspeed. 
14 underspeed device 
A device that functions when the speed of a machine falls below a 
predetermined value. 
15 
speed or frequency 
matching device 
A device that functions to match and hold the speed or frequency of a 
machine or a system equal to, or approximately equal to, that of another 
machine, source, or system. 
18 
accelerating or 
decelerating device 
A device that is used to close or cause the closing of circuits that are used 
to increase or decrease the speed of a machine. 
25 
synchronizing or 
synchronism-check 
relay 
A synchronizing device produces an output that causes closure at zero-phase 
angle difference between two circuits. It may or may not include 
voltage and speed control. A synchronism-check relay permits the 
paralleling of two circuits that are within prescribed limits of voltage 
magnitude, phase angle, and frequency. 
27 undervoltage relay 
A device that operates when its input voltage is less than a predetermined 
value. 
30 annunciator relay 
A non-automatically reset device that gives a number of separate visual 
indications upon the functioning of protective devices and that may also be 
arranged to perform a lockout function.
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
111 
31 
separate excitation 
device 
A device that connects a circuit, such as the shunt field of a synchronous 
converter, to a source of separate excitation during the starting sequence. 
32 
directional power 
relay 
A device that operates on a predetermined value of power flow in a given 
direction such as reverse power flow resulting from the motoring of a 
generator upon loss of its prime mover. 
46 
reverse-phase or 
phase-balance 
current relay 
A device in a polyphase circuit that operates when the polyphase currents 
are of reverse-phase sequence or when the polyphase currents are 
unbalanced or when the negative phase-sequence current exceeds a preset 
value. 
48 
incomplete 
sequence relay 
A device that generally returns the equipment to the normal or off position 
and locks it out if the normal starting, operating, or stopping sequence is not 
properly completed within a predetermined time. 
50 
instantaneous 
overcurrent relay 
A device that operates with no intentional time delay when the current 
exceeds a preset value. 
51 
ac time overcurrent 
relay 
A device that functions when the ac input current exceeds a predetermined 
value, and in which the input current and operating time are inversely related 
through a substantial portion of the performance range.
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
112 
Device Description 
52 ac circuit breaker 
A device that is used to close and interrupt an ac power circuit under normal 
conditions or to interrupt this circuit under fault or emergency conditions. 
54 
turning gear 
engaging device 
A device electrically operated, controlled, or monitored that functions to 
cause the turning gear to engage (or disengage) the machine shaft. 
55 power factor relay 
A device that operates when the power factor in an ac circuit rises above or 
falls below a predetermined value. 
59 overvoltage relay 
A device that operates when its input voltage exceeds a predetermined 
value. 
62 
time-delay stopping 
or opening relay 
A device that imposes a time delay in conjunction with the device that 
initiates the shutdown, stopping, or opening operation in an automatic 
sequence or protective relay system. 
63 pressure switch 
A device that operates at a given pressure value or at a given rate of 
change of pressure. 
69 
permissive control 
device 
A device with two-positions that in one position permits the closing of a 
circuit breaker, or the placing of a piece of equipment into operation, and in 
the other position, prevents the circuit breaker or the equipment from being 
operated. 
71 level switch 
A device that operates at a given level value, or on a given rate of change 
of level. 
74 alarm relay 
A device other than an annunciator, as covered under device function 30, 
that is used to operate, or that operates in connection with, a visual or 
audible alarm. 
78 
phase-angle 
measuring relay 
A device that functions at a predetermined phase angle between two 
voltages, between two currents, or between voltage and current. 
81 frequency relay 
A device that responds to the frequency of an electrical quantity, operating 
when the frequency or rate of change of frequency exceeds or is less than 
a predetermined value. 
83 
automatic selective 
control or transfer 
relay 
A device that operates to select automatically between certain sources or 
conditions in equipment or that performs a transfer operation automatically. 
86 lockout relay 
A device that trips and maintains the associated equipment or devices 
inoperative until it is reset by an operator, either locally or remotely. 
90 regulating device 
A device that functions to regulate a quantity or quantities, such as voltage, 
current, power, speed, frequency, temperature, and load, at a certain value 
or between certain (generally close) limits for machines, tie lines, or other 
apparatus.
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
13 COMMISSIONING 
13.1.1 PRE-COMMISSIONING 
Before the system is started, it is recommended that the following checks are made:- 
10.1. The unit is adequately cooled and all the wiring to the module is of a standard and rating compatible with 
the system. Check all mechanical parts are fitted correctly and that all electrical connections (including 
earths) are sound. 
10.2. The unit DC supply is fused and connected to the battery and that it is of the correct polarity. 
10.3. The Emergency Stop input is wired to an external normally closed switch connected to DC positive. 
NOTE:- If Emergency Stop feature is not required, link this input to the DC Positive. The module 
will not operate unless either the Emergency Stop is fitted correctly OR terminal 3 is connected to DC 
positive. 
10.4. Make all checks on the engine and alternator as detailed by their respective manufacturer 
113 
documentation. 
10.5. Check all other parts in the system according to the manufacturer documentation. 
10.6. Thoroughly review the configuration of the DSE controller and check that all parameters meet the 
requirements of your system. 
10.7. To check the start cycle operation, take appropriate measures to prevent the engine from starting 
(disable the operation of the fuel solenoid). After a visual inspection to ensure it is safe to proceed, 
connect the battery supply. Select “MANUAL” and then press “START” the unit start sequence will 
commence. 
10.8. The starter will engage and operate for the pre-set crank period. After the starter motor has attempted 
to start the engine for the pre-set number of attempts, the LCD will display ‘Failed to start. Select the 
STOP/RESET position to reset the unit. 
10.9. Restore the engine to operational status (reconnect the fuel solenoid). Select “MANUAL” and then press 
“START”. This time the engine will start and the starter motor will disengage automatically. If not then 
check the engine is fully operational (fuel available, etc.) and the fuel solenoid is operating. The engine 
will now run up to operating speed. If not, and an alarm is present, check the alarm condition for validity, 
and check input wiring. The engine will continue to run for an indefinite period. At this time to view the 
engine and alternator parameters - refer to the ‘Description of Controls’ section of this manual. 
10.10. Fully commission the engine/alternator and any other parts in the system as detailed in the respective 
manufacturer documentation. This includes load bank testing, load acceptance, breaker control and 
more. 
10.11. When building a synchronising system, follow the DSE “4 Steps To Synchronising” as detailed elsewhere 
in this document before attempting to parallel the set with another supply. 
10.12. Set the modules internal clock/calendar to ensure correct operation of the scheduler and event logging 
functions. For details of this procedure see section entitled Front Panel Configuration – Editing the date 
and time. 
10.13. If despite repeated checking of the connections between the 8600 series controller and the customer’s 
system, satisfactory operation cannot be achieved, then the customer is requested to contact the factory 
for further advice on:- 
INTERNATIONAL TEL: +44 (0) 1723 890099 
INTERNATIONAL FAX: +44 (0) 1723 893303 
E-mail: Support@Deepseaplc.com
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
Website : www.deepseaplc.com 
114
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
115 
14 FAULT FINDING 
SYMPTOM POSSIBLE REMEDY 
Unit is inoperative 
Read/Write configuration does not 
operate 
Check the battery and wiring to the unit. Check the DC supply. Check the DC 
fuse. 
Unit shuts down Check DC supply voltage is not above 35 Volts or below 9 Volts 
Check the operating temperature is not above 70°C. Check the DC fuse. 
Unit locks out on Emergency Stop If no Emergency Stop Switch is fitted, ensure that a DC positive signal is 
connected to the Emergency Stop input. Check emergency stop switch is 
functioning correctly. Check Wiring is not open circuit. 
Intermittent Magnetic Pick-up 
sensor fault 
Ensure that Magnetic pick-up screen only connects to earth at one end, if 
connected at both ends, this enables the screen to act as an aerial and will pick 
up random voltages. Check pickup is correct distance from the flywheel teeth. 
Low oil Pressure fault operates 
after engine has fired 
Check engine oil pressure. Check oil pressure switch/sensor and wiring. Check 
configured polarity (if applicable) is correct (i.e. Normally Open or Normally 
Closed) or that sensor is compatible with the 73x0 Module and is correctly 
configured. 
High engine temperature fault 
operates after engine has fired. 
Check engine temperature. Check switch/sensor and wiring. Check configured 
polarity (if applicable) is correct (i.e. Normally Open or Normally Closed) or that 
sensor is compatible with the 8600 series module. 
Shutdown fault operates Check relevant switch and wiring of fault indicated on LCD display. Check 
configuration of input. 
Warning fault operates Check relevant switch and wiring of fault indicated on LCD display. Check 
configuration of input. 
Fail to Start is activated after pre-set 
number of attempts to start 
Check wiring of fuel solenoid. Check fuel. Check battery supply. Check battery 
supply is present on the Fuel output of the module. Check the speed-sensing 
signal is present on the 8600 series module’s inputs. Refer to engine manual. 
Continuous starting of generator 
when in AUTO 
Check that there is no signal present on the “Remote Start” input. Check 
configured polarity is correct. 
Generator fails to start on receipt 
of Remote Start signal. 
Check Start Delay timer has timed out. 
Check signal is on “Remote Start” input. Confirm correct configuration of input 
Check that the oil pressure switch or sensor is indicating low oil pressure to the 
controller. Depending upon configuration, then set will not start if oil pressure is 
not low. 
Pre-heat inoperative Check wiring to engine heater plugs. Check battery supply. Check battery 
supply is present on the Pre-heat output of module. Check pre-heat 
configuration is correct. 
Starter motor inoperative Check wiring to starter solenoid. Check battery supply. Check battery supply is 
present on the Starter output of module. Ensure that the Emergency Stop input 
is at Positive. Ensure oil pressure switch or sensor is indicating the “low oil 
pressure” state to the 8610 series controller. 
Engine runs but generator will not 
take load 
Check Warm up timer has timed out. Ensure generator load inhibit signal is not 
present on the module inputs. Check connections to the switching device. 
Note that the set will not take load in manual mode unless there is an active 
remote start on load signal. 
Synchronising or load sharing is 
not operating satisfactorily 
Follow the DSE “4 Steps To Synchronising” as detailed in the following section.
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
SYMPTOM POSSIBLE REMEDY 
116 
Incorrect reading on Engine 
gauges 
Fail to stop alarm when engine is 
at rest 
Check engine is operating correctly. Check sensor and wiring paying particular 
attention to the wiring to terminal 47 (refer to appendix). Check that sensor is 
compatible with the 8600 series module and that the module configuration is 
suited to the sensor. 
Module appears to ‘revert’ to an 
earlier configuration 
When editing a configuration using the PC software it is vital that the 
configuration is first ‘read’ from the controller before editing it. This edited 
configuration must then be “written” back to the controller for the changes to 
take effect. 
When editing a configuration using the fascia editor, be sure to press the 
Accept button to save the change before moving to another item or exiting 
the fascia editor 
Set will not take load Ensure the generator available LED is lit 
Check that the output configuration is correct to drive the load switch device 
and that all connections are correct. 
Remember that the set will not take load in manual mode unless a remote start 
on load input is present or the close generator button is pressed. 
Inaccurate generator 
measurements on controller 
display 
Check that the CT primary, CT secondary and VT ratio settings are correct for 
the application. 
Check that the CTs are wired correctly with regards to the direction of current 
flow (p1,p2 and s1,s2) and additionally ensure that CTs are connected to the 
correct phase (errors will occur if CT1 is connected to phase 2). 
Remember to consider the power factor. Ie (kW = kVA x power factor) 
The 8600 series controller is true RMS measuring so gives more accurate 
display when compared with an ‘averaging’ meter such as an analogue panel 
meter or some lower specified digital multimeters. 
Accuracy of the controller is better than 1% of full scale. I.e. Gen volts full 
scale is 333V ph-n so accuracy is ±3.33V (1% of 333V). 
NOTE:- The above fault finding is provided as a guide check-list only. As the module is 
configurable for a range of different features, always refer to the source of your module configuration 
if in doubt.
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
15 DSE 4 STEPS TO SUCCESSFUL SYNCHRONISING 
Synchronising and load sharing is often considered to be a complex subject. In fact, it is very simple when 
broken down into smaller steps. 
After following the Commissioning section of this manual, the 4 Steps must be followed before any parallel 
operation is attempted. 
The following information is a short form guide only, intended as a memory jogger once the steps are fully 
understood. 
The full video presentation of the 4 Steps is available on the DSE website. www.deepseaplc.com. Registration 
on the website is required. This is free of charge, along with all other downloads. 
This page is also available as a training document (handout style) from DSE. Part Number 056-001 Four Steps 
to Synchronising – included on the DSE website. 
15.1 CONTROL 
117 
Check the control of the engine is working: 
· Control of AVR 
· Control of Governor 
· Direction of Control 
Failure of the above steps will result in poor control of the governor/AVR leading to problems during 
synchronising and/or load sharing if not corrected. 
15.2 METERING 
· CTs on the Right Phase 
· CTs in the Right Direction 
Failure of the above steps will result in incorrect power factor and kW calculations leading to problems 
load sharing if not corrected. 
15.3 COMMUNICATIONS 
· All Modules Connected on the MSC Link 
· Re-Calibrate, Sync + Load Control, Multi-Set 
· Remove One MSC Plug 
Failure of the above steps will result in the controllers being unable to communicate leading to 
problems during synchronising and/or load sharing if not corrected. 
15.4 SYNC CHECKS 
· Use the Built in Sync Scope to Determine Correct Phase Wiring 
· Phase Checks across the Breaker. 
Failure of the above steps will result in serious damage to the system (breakers, bus bars, alternators, 
engines etc)
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
16 MAINTENANCE, SPARES, REPAIR AND SERVICING 
The DSE8600 Series controller is Fit and Forget. As such, there are no user serviceable parts within the 
controller. 
In the case of malfunction, you should contact your original equipment manufacturer (OEM). 
16.1 PURCHASING ADDITIONAL CONNECTOR PLUGS FROM DSE 
If you require additional plugs from DSE, please contact our Sales department using the part numbers below. 
118 
16.1.1.1 Pack of plugs 
Module type Plug Pack Part Number 
DSE8620 100-400-86 
16.1.1.2 Individual plugs 
8600 series terminal designation Plug description Part No. 
1-13 
13 way 5.08mm 007-166 
15-19 5 way 5.08mm 007-445 
22-38 
MSC GOV AVR 17 way 5.08mm 007-452 
39-46 V1 8 way 7.62mm 007-454 
47-50 V2 4 way 7.62mm 007-171 
51-57 7 way 5.08mm 007-447 
60-70 11 way 5.08mm 007-451 
PC Configuration interface lead 
(USB type A – USB type B) 
016-125 
NOTE:- Terminals 20, 21, 58 and 59 are not fitted to DSE8600 series controllers. 
16.2 PURCHASING ADDITIONAL FIXING CLIPS FROM DSE 
Item Description Part No. 
8600 series fixing clips (packet of 4) 020-294 
16.3 PURCHASING ADDITIONAL SEALING GASKET FROM DSE 
Item Description Part No. 
8600 series silicon sealing gasket 020-507
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
16.4 DSENET EXPANSION MODULES 
NOTE:- A maximum of twenty (20) expansion modules can be connected to the DSENet®. 
NOTE:- DSENet® utilises an RS485 connection. Using Belden 9841 (or equivalent) cable allows for 
the expansion cable to be extended to a maximum of 1.2km. 
DSE Stock and supply Belden 9841 cable. DSE Part Number 016-030. 
119 
Item Description 
DSE Part numbers 
Max No. 
supported 
Model order 
number 
Sales 
literature 
Operator 
manual 
Installation 
Instructions 
4 
Model DSE2130 expansion input module 
provides additional analogue and digital 
inputs for use with the DSE8600 series 
controller. 
2130-001-00 055-060 057-082 053-033 
10 
Model DSE2157 expansion relay module 
provides eight additional voltage free relays 
for use with the DSE8600 series controller 
2157-001-00 055-061 057-083 053-034 
10 
Model DSE2548 expansion LED module 
provides additional LED indications, internal 
sounder and remote lamp test/alarm mute 
for use with the DSE8600 series controller. 
2548-001-00 055-062 057-084 053-032 
16.5 ETHERNET (LAN) CONNECTION 
NOTE: - DSE860 and DSE865 cannot be used with the DSE8620 although this module does have 
its own dedicated Ethernet port. (See beginning of manual for details)
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
120 
17 WARRANTY 
DSE provides limited warranty to the equipment purchaser at the point of sale. For full details of any applicable 
warranty, you are referred to your original equipment supplier (OEM). 
18 DISPOSAL 
18.1 WEEE (WASTE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT) 
Directive 2002/96/EC 
If you use electrical and electronic equipment you must store, collect, treat, recycle and dispose of 
WEEE separately from your other waste. 
18.2 ROHS (RESTRICTION OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES) 
Directive 2002/95/EC: 2006 
To remove specified hazardous substances (Lead, Mercury, Hexavalent Chromium, Cadmium, PBB & PBDE´s) 
Exemption Note: Category 9. (Monitoring & Control Instruments) as defined in Annex 1B of the WEEE directive 
will be exempt from the RoHS legislation. This was confirmed in the August 2005 UK´s Department of Trade 
and Industry RoHS REGULATIONS Guide (Para 11). 
Despite this exemption, DSE has been carefully removing all non RoHS compliant components from our supply 
chain and products. 
When this is completed, a Lead Free & RoHS compatible manufacturing process will be phased into DSE 
production. 
This process that is almost complete and is being phased through different product groups.
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
This page is intentionally left blank 
121
DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 
This page is intentionally left blank. 
122

More Related Content

PPT
Chapter10 switching
DOCX
Double Side band Suppressed carrier (DSB-SC) Modulation and Demodulation.
PPT
Chapter 6m
PDF
Analog Vs Digital Signals
PDF
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
PPTX
Modulation
PPT
Multiplexing and spreading
PPT
Chapter 4
Chapter10 switching
Double Side band Suppressed carrier (DSB-SC) Modulation and Demodulation.
Chapter 6m
Analog Vs Digital Signals
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
Modulation
Multiplexing and spreading
Chapter 4

What's hot (20)

PDF
Analog & Digital Integrated Circuits - Material (Short Answers)
PPTX
Fm demodulation using zero crossing detector
PPTX
Module4: opamp as a V-I & I-V Converter
PDF
Teletraffic engineering handbook
PPTX
Unit 2 sdr architecture
PDF
PCB Design with KiCad.pdf
PPTX
Radio receiver characteristics
PPTX
Elements of digital communication
PDF
Seminar on smart antenna systems
PPT
Basic of Satellite Communication
PDF
Pulse amplitude modulation & demodulation
PDF
Basics of channel coding
PPT
Chapt 03
PDF
Verilog full adder in dataflow & gate level modelling style.
PDF
1.introduction to signals
DOC
Chap 6
DOCX
Signals & systems
PPTX
An overwiew of cdma
Analog & Digital Integrated Circuits - Material (Short Answers)
Fm demodulation using zero crossing detector
Module4: opamp as a V-I & I-V Converter
Teletraffic engineering handbook
Unit 2 sdr architecture
PCB Design with KiCad.pdf
Radio receiver characteristics
Elements of digital communication
Seminar on smart antenna systems
Basic of Satellite Communication
Pulse amplitude modulation & demodulation
Basics of channel coding
Chapt 03
Verilog full adder in dataflow & gate level modelling style.
1.introduction to signals
Chap 6
Signals & systems
An overwiew of cdma
Ad

Viewers also liked (7)

PDF
Dse4510 dse4520-operator-manual
PDF
322 electrical system caterpillar (1)
PDF
5 módulo de expansão de saídas dse2157
PDF
DSE 6010/20 - manual operation
PDF
Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual 3500 b engines s
PPTX
Caterpillar
PPT
Engine systems diesel engine analyst - full
Dse4510 dse4520-operator-manual
322 electrical system caterpillar (1)
5 módulo de expansão de saídas dse2157
DSE 6010/20 - manual operation
Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual 3500 b engines s
Caterpillar
Engine systems diesel engine analyst - full
Ad

Similar to Dse8620 operators-manual (20)

DOCX
Tilak's Report
PDF
Motorola ap650 access point installation guide (part no. 72 e 131207-01 rev. d )
PDF
Ap650 installation guide_72_e-131207-01_revd
PDF
Ap650 installation guide_72_e-131207-01_revd
PDF
Motorola ap650 access point installation guide (part no. 72 e 131207-01 rev. d )
PDF
Plugin anrit sitemasterseri30416
PDF
Siemens s7 300-400-sm 338 ultrasonic position encoding module
PDF
LED Driver "BCR401W" | Infineon Technologies
PDF
Final paper0
PDF
LED Driver "BCR402W" | Infineon Technologies
PDF
Manual Hardware CLP Schneider - M258
PDF
ISCO-3700-Manual.pdf
PDF
Manual CLP Omron CP1H
PDF
Opd scan
PDF
Opd scan
PDF
Opd scan
PDF
Pci 8158 manual-10
PDF
In ultramat 23
PDF
MTX Series service manual 6881200C75-B.pdf
PDF
Bucher lift control guide
Tilak's Report
Motorola ap650 access point installation guide (part no. 72 e 131207-01 rev. d )
Ap650 installation guide_72_e-131207-01_revd
Ap650 installation guide_72_e-131207-01_revd
Motorola ap650 access point installation guide (part no. 72 e 131207-01 rev. d )
Plugin anrit sitemasterseri30416
Siemens s7 300-400-sm 338 ultrasonic position encoding module
LED Driver "BCR401W" | Infineon Technologies
Final paper0
LED Driver "BCR402W" | Infineon Technologies
Manual Hardware CLP Schneider - M258
ISCO-3700-Manual.pdf
Manual CLP Omron CP1H
Opd scan
Opd scan
Opd scan
Pci 8158 manual-10
In ultramat 23
MTX Series service manual 6881200C75-B.pdf
Bucher lift control guide

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
MicrosoftCybserSecurityReferenceArchitecture-April-2025.pptx
PPTX
observCloud-Native Containerability and monitoring.pptx
PPTX
Group 1 Presentation -Planning and Decision Making .pptx
PDF
How ambidextrous entrepreneurial leaders react to the artificial intelligence...
PDF
1 - Historical Antecedents, Social Consideration.pdf
PDF
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles – August ’25 Week III
PPTX
Programs and apps: productivity, graphics, security and other tools
PPTX
Tartificialntelligence_presentation.pptx
PPTX
The various Industrial Revolutions .pptx
PDF
Microsoft Solutions Partner Drive Digital Transformation with D365.pdf
PDF
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25-Week II
PPTX
Final SEM Unit 1 for mit wpu at pune .pptx
PDF
Zenith AI: Advanced Artificial Intelligence
PDF
WOOl fibre morphology and structure.pdf for textiles
PDF
August Patch Tuesday
PPT
Module 1.ppt Iot fundamentals and Architecture
PDF
Assigned Numbers - 2025 - Bluetooth® Document
PDF
Getting Started with Data Integration: FME Form 101
PPTX
Chapter 5: Probability Theory and Statistics
PDF
DASA ADMISSION 2024_FirstRound_FirstRank_LastRank.pdf
MicrosoftCybserSecurityReferenceArchitecture-April-2025.pptx
observCloud-Native Containerability and monitoring.pptx
Group 1 Presentation -Planning and Decision Making .pptx
How ambidextrous entrepreneurial leaders react to the artificial intelligence...
1 - Historical Antecedents, Social Consideration.pdf
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles – August ’25 Week III
Programs and apps: productivity, graphics, security and other tools
Tartificialntelligence_presentation.pptx
The various Industrial Revolutions .pptx
Microsoft Solutions Partner Drive Digital Transformation with D365.pdf
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25-Week II
Final SEM Unit 1 for mit wpu at pune .pptx
Zenith AI: Advanced Artificial Intelligence
WOOl fibre morphology and structure.pdf for textiles
August Patch Tuesday
Module 1.ppt Iot fundamentals and Architecture
Assigned Numbers - 2025 - Bluetooth® Document
Getting Started with Data Integration: FME Form 101
Chapter 5: Probability Theory and Statistics
DASA ADMISSION 2024_FirstRound_FirstRank_LastRank.pdf

Dse8620 operators-manual

  • 1. DSE8620 Operating Manual Issue 1 + DEEP SEA ELECTRONICS PLC DSE8620 Control Module Operating Manual Document number 057-142
  • 2. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 2 DEEP SEA ELECTRONICS PLC Highfield House Hunmanby North Yorkshire YO14 0PH ENGLAND Sales Tel: +44 (0) 1723 890099 Sales Fax: +44 (0) 1723 893303 E-mail : sales@Deepseaplc.com Website : www.deepseaplc.com DSE8620 Automatic Mains Failure (AMF) control Module. © Deep Sea Electronics Plc All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any material form (including photocopying or storing in any medium by electronic means or other) without the written permission of the copyright holder except in accordance with the provisions of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988. Applications for the copyright holder’s written permission to reproduce any part of this publication should be addressed to Deep Sea Electronics Plc at the address above. The DSE logo is a UK registered trademarks of Deep Sea Electronics PLC. Any reference to trademarked product names used within this publication is owned by their respective companies. Deep Sea Electronics Plc reserves the right to change the contents of this document without prior notice. Amendments List Issue Comments Minimum Module version required Minimum Configuration Suite Version required 1 Initial release V4.3.35 2011.10v1.0.7 Typeface: The typeface used in this document is Arial. Care should be taken not to mistake the upper case letter I with the numeral 1. The numeral 1 has a top serif to avoid this confusion. Clarification of notation used within this publication. NOTE: Highlights an essential element of a procedure to ensure correctness. CAUTION! Indicates a procedure or practice, which, if not strictly observed, could result in damage or destruction of equipment. WARNING! Indicates a procedure or practice, which could result in injury to personnel or loss of life if not followed correctly.
  • 3. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page 1 BIBLIOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................7 1.1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................. 7 1.2 TRAINING GUIDES ..................................................................................................... 7 1.3 MANUALS .................................................................................................................. 7 2 INTRODUCTION ...........................................................................................8 3 SPECIFICATIONS.........................................................................................9 3.1 PART NUMBERING .................................................................................................... 9 3.1.1 SHORT NAMES .................................................................................................... 9 3.2 TERMINAL SPECIFICATION ..................................................................................... 10 3.3 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... 10 3.4 GENERATOR VOLTAGE / FREQUENCY SENSING ................................................... 10 3.5 GENERATOR CURRENT SENSING........................................................................... 11 3.5.1 VA RATING OF THE CTS ................................................................................... 11 3.5.2 CT POLARITY .................................................................................................... 12 3.5.3 CT PHASING ...................................................................................................... 12 3.5.4 CT CLASS.......................................................................................................... 12 3.6 INPUTS .................................................................................................................... 13 3.6.1 DIGITAL INPUTS ................................................................................................ 13 3.6.1 ANALOGUE INPUTS ........................................................................................... 13 3.6.2 CHARGE FAIL INPUT ......................................................................................... 14 3.6.3 MAGNETIC PICKUP ........................................................................................... 14 3.7 OUTPUTS ................................................................................................................ 15 3.7.1 OUTPUTS A & B ................................................................................................. 15 3.7.2 CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS C & D (LOAD SWITCHING) ...................................... 15 3.7.1 OUTPUTS E,F,G,H, I ,J & K ................................................................................ 16 3.8 COMMUNICATION PORTS ....................................................................................... 17 3.9 COMMUNICATION PORT USAGE ............................................................................ 17 3.9.1 CAN INTERFACE............................................................................................... 17 3.9.2 USB CONNECTION ............................................................................................ 18 3.9.3 USB HOST-MASTER (USB DRIVE CONNECTION) ............................................... 18 3.9.4 RS232................................................................................................................ 19 3.9.5 RS485................................................................................................................ 21 3.9.6 ETHERNET ........................................................................................................ 22 3.10 DSENET® FOR EXPANSION MODULES............................................................... 28 3.10.1 DSENET® USED FOR MODBUS ENGINE CONNECTION ..................................... 28 3.11 SOUNDER............................................................................................................. 29 3.11.1 ADDING AN EXTERNAL SOUNDER TO THE APPLICATION ................................. 29 3.12 ACCUMULATED INSTRUMENTATION ................................................................... 29 3.13 DIMENSIONS AND MOUNTING ............................................................................. 30 3.13.1 DIMENSIONS ..................................................................................................... 30 3.13.2 FIXING CLIPS .................................................................................................... 31 3.13.3 CABLE TIE FIXING POINTS................................................................................ 32 3.13.4 SILICON SEALING GASKET ............................................................................... 32 3.14 APPLICABLE STANDARDS ................................................................................... 33 3.14.1 ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 34 IP CLASSIFICATIONS .................................................................................................. 34 3.14.2 NEMA CLASSIFICATIONS .................................................................................. 35 4 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................... 36
  • 4. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 4.1 TERMINAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................ 36 4.1.1 DC SUPPLY, FUEL AND START OUTPUTS, OUTPUTS E-J .................................. 37 4.1.2 ANALOGUE SENSOR ......................................................................................... 38 4.1.3 MAGNETIC PICKUP, CAN AND EXPANSION ....................................................... 39 4.1.4 V1 LOAD SWITCHING AND GENERATOR VOLTAGE SENSING .......................... 40 4.1.5 V2 MAINS VOLTAGE SENSING ......................................................................... 40 4.1.6 GENERATOR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ........................................................ 41 4.1.7 MAINS CURRENT TRANSFORMERS .................................................................. 41 4.1.8 CONFIGURABLE DIGITAL INPUTS ..................................................................... 43 4.1.9 PC CONFIGURATION INTERFACE CONNECTOR................................................ 43 4.1.10 RS485 CONNECTOR .......................................................................................... 44 4.1.11 RS232 CONNECTOR .......................................................................................... 44 4.2 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS ................................................................................... 45 4.2.1 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION .................. 46 4.3 ALTERNATIVE TOPOLOGIES .................................................................................. 47 4.3.1 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT PROTECTION ................................. 47 4.3.2 SINGLE PHASE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT............................................ 48 4.3.3 SINGLE PHASE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT........................................................... 48 4.3.4 2 PHASE (L1 & L2) 3 WIRE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT .......................... 49 4.3.5 2 PHASE (L1 & L2) 3 WIRE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT ......................................... 49 4.3.6 2 PHASE (L1 & L3) 3 WIRE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT .......................... 50 4.3.7 2 PHASE (L1 & L3) 3 WIRE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT MEASURING ..................... 50 4.3.8 3 PHASE 4 WIRE WITH UNRESTRICTED EARTH FAULT MEASURING ................ 51 4.3.9 EARTH SYSTEMS .............................................................................................. 51 4.4 TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT OF DSENET® ................................................................. 52 4.4.1 EARTH SYSTEMS .............................................................................................. 53 5 DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS .................................................................. 54 5.1 DSE8620 AUTOMATIC MAINS FAILURE (AMF) CONTROL MODULE ........................ 54 5.2 VIEWING THE INSTRUMENT PAGES ....................................................................... 56 5.2.1 STATUS ............................................................................................................. 57 5.2.2 ENGINE ............................................................................................................. 58 5.2.3 GENERATOR ..................................................................................................... 59 5.2.4 MAINS ............................................................................................................... 59 5.2.1 RS232 SERIAL PORT ......................................................................................... 60 5.2.1 RS485 SERIAL PORT ......................................................................................... 63 5.2.2 ABOUT .............................................................................................................. 64 5.2.1 CAN ERROR MESSAGES................................................................................... 66 5.3 VIEWING THE EVENT LOG ...................................................................................... 67 5.4 USER CONFIGURABLE INDICATORS ....................................................................... 68 6 OPERATION ............................................................................................... 69 6.1 CONTROL ................................................................................................................ 69 6.2 CONTROL PUSH-BUTTONS .................................................................................... 70 6.3 DUMMY LOAD / LOAD SHEDDING CONTROL .......................................................... 72 6.4 STOP MODE ............................................................................................................ 73 6.4.1 ECU OVERRIDE ................................................................................................. 74 6.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ........................................................................................ 75 6.5.1 MAINS FAILURE................................................................................................. 75 6.5.1 ENGINE RUNNING.............................................................................................. 76 6.5.2 REMOTE START IN ISLAND MODE .................................................................... 77 6.5.3 REMOTE START ON LOAD ................................................................................ 79 6.6 MANUAL OPERATION .............................................................................................. 81 6.7 TEST OPERATION ................................................................................................... 83 7 PROTECTIONS ........................................................................................... 85 7.1 PROTECTIONS DISABLED ....................................................................................... 86 7.1.1 INDICATION / WARNING ALARMS...................................................................... 86 4
  • 5. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 7.1.2 SHUTDOWN / ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARMS......................................................... 86 7.1.3 CAN ALARMS .................................................................................................... 87 7.2 INDICATIONS ........................................................................................................... 88 7.3 WARNINGS .............................................................................................................. 89 7.4 HIGH CURRENT WARNING ALARM .......................................................................... 90 7.5 SHUTDOWNS........................................................................................................... 91 7.6 ELECTRICAL TRIPS ................................................................................................. 93 7.7 HIGH CURRENT SHUTDOWN / ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARM ...................................... 94 7.7.1 IMMEDIATE WARNING ...................................................................................... 94 7.7.2 IDMT ALARM ..................................................................................................... 94 7.8 EARTH FAULT SHUTDOWN / ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARM ........................................ 96 7.9 SHORT CIRCUIT ALARM .......................................................................................... 96 7.10 ROCOF / VECTOR SHIFT...................................................................................... 97 7.10.1 MAINS DECOUPLING TEST MODE .................................................................... 97 8 SCHEDULER .............................................................................................. 98 8.1.1 STOP MODE...................................................................................................... 98 8.1.2 MANUAL MODE ................................................................................................. 98 8.1.3 AUTO MODE...................................................................................................... 98 9 SYNCHROSCOPE OPERATION.................................................................. 99 10 COMMISSIONING .................................................................................. 100 10.1 COMMISSIONING SCREENS ............................................................................... 100 10.1.1 SCREEN 1 ....................................................................................................... 100 10.1.2 SCREEN 2 ....................................................................................................... 100 10.1.3 SCREEN 3 ....................................................................................................... 100 10.1.4 SCREEN 4 ....................................................................................................... 100 11 FRONT PANEL CONFIGURATION ........................................................ 101 11.1 ACCESSING THE MAIN FRONT PANEL CONFIGURATION EDITOR .................... 102 11.1.1 EDITING A PARAMETER .................................................................................. 103 11.2 ADJUSTABLE PARAMETERS.............................................................................. 104 11.3 ACCESSING THE ‘RUNNING’ CONFIGURATION EDITOR .................................... 105 11.3.1 EDITING A PARAMETER .................................................................................. 105 11.3.2 ADJUSTABLE PARAMETERS (RUNNING EDITOR) ............................................ 105 12 FAULT FINDING .................................................................................... 106 12.1.1 EARTH FAULT TRIPPING CURVES ................................................................... 107 12.1.2 SHORT CIRCUIT TRIPPING CURVES ............................................................... 108 12.2 COMMUNICATIONS OPTION .............................................................................. 109 12.2.1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 109 12.2.2 CONTROLLER TO PC (DIRECT) CONNECTION ................................................ 109 12.2.3 MODBUS ......................................................................................................... 110 12.3 IEEE C37.2 STANDARD ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM FUNCTION NUMBERS.. 110 13 COMMISSIONING .................................................................................. 113 13.1.1 PRE-COMMISSIONING .................................................................................... 113 14 FAULT FINDING .................................................................................... 115 15 DSE 4 STEPS TO SUCCESSFUL SYNCHRONISING ............................. 117 15.1 CONTROL .......................................................................................................... 117 15.2 METERING ......................................................................................................... 117 15.3 COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................................................ 117 15.4 SYNC CHECKS ................................................................................................... 117 16 MAINTENANCE, SPARES, REPAIR AND SERVICING .......................... 118 16.1 PURCHASING ADDITIONAL CONNECTOR PLUGS FROM DSE ........................... 118 5
  • 6. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 16.2 PURCHASING ADDITIONAL FIXING CLIPS FROM DSE........................................ 118 16.3 PURCHASING ADDITIONAL SEALING GASKET FROM DSE ................................ 118 16.4 DSENET EXPANSION MODULES ........................................................................ 119 16.5 ETHERNET (LAN) CONNECTION ........................................................................ 119 17 WARRANTY ........................................................................................... 120 18 DISPOSAL ............................................................................................. 120 18.1 WEEE (WASTE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT) .......................... 120 18.2 ROHS (RESTRICTION OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES) ..................................... 120 6
  • 7. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 7 1 BIBLIOGRAPHY This document refers to and is referred to by the following DSE publications which can be obtained from the DSE website www.deepseaplc.com 1.1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Installation instructions are supplied with the product in the box and are intended as a ‘quick start’ guide only. DSE PART DESCRIPTION 053-129 DSE8620 Installation Instructions 053-032 DSE2548 LED Expansion Annunciator Installation Instructions 053-033 DSE2130 Input Expansion Installation Instructions 053-034 DSE2157 Output Expansion Installation Instructions 1.2 TRAINING GUIDES Training Guides are produced to give ‘handout’ sheets on specific subjects during training sessions DSE PART DESCRIPTION 056-005 Using CTs With DSE Products 056-010 Overcurrent Protection 056-018 Negative Phase Sequence 056-019 Earth Fault Protection 056-020 Loss of Excitation 056-021 Mains Decoupling (G59) 056-022 Breaker Control 056-024 GSM Modem 056-026 kW & kVAr 056-029 Smoke Limiting 056-030 Module PIN Codes 056-057 SW1 & SW2 1.3 MANUALS DSE PART DESCRIPTION 057-004 Electronic Engines and DSE wiring 057-045 DSE Guide to Synchronising and Load Sharing Part1 057-046 DSE Guide to Synchronising and Load Sharing Part2 057-047 DSE Load Share Design and Commissioning Guide 057-119 DSE8600 Series Configuration Software Manual 057-082 DSE2130 Input Expansion Manual 057-083 DSE2157 Output Expansion Manual 057-084 DSE2548 Annunciator Expansion Manual Additionally this document refers to the following third party publications REFERENCE DESCRIPTION ISBN 1-55937-879-4 IEEE Std C37.2-1996 IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers and Contact Designations. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc ISBN 0-7506-1147-2 Diesel generator handbook. L.L.J.Mahon ISBN 0-9625949-3-8 On-Site Power Generation. EGSA Education Committee.
  • 8. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 8 2 INTRODUCTION This document details the installation and operation requirements of the DSE8600 Series modules, part of the DSEGenset® range of products. The manual forms part of the product and should be kept for the entire life of the product. If the product is passed or supplied to another party, ensure that this document is passed to them for reference purposes. This is not a controlled document. You will not be automatically informed of updates. Any future updates of this document will be included on the DSE website at www.deepseaplc.com The DSE8620 module has been designed to allow the operator to start and stop the generator, and if required, transfer the load to the generator either manually (via fascia mounted push-buttons) or automatically. Utilising the inbuilt synchronising, volts matching and paralleling functions, the controller is able to parallel with the mains supply for soft transfer of peak lopping. Synchronsing and Load Sharing features are included within the controller, along with the necessary protections for such a system. The DSE8620 has mains failure detection to enable the transfer of load to a generator and return back upon restoration of the mains with added features to avoid transients of the supply. The user also has the facility to view the system operating parameters via the LCD display. The DSE8620 module monitors the engine, indicating the operational status and fault conditions, automatically shutting down the engine and giving a true first up fault condition of an engine failure by a COMMON AUDIBLE ALARM. The LCD display indicates the fault. The powerful ARM microprocessor contained within the module allows for incorporation of a range of complex features: · Text based LCD display (supporting multiple languages). · True RMS Voltage, Current and Power monitoring. · Communications capability (RS485, RS232 or Ethernet) · Engine parameter monitoring. · Automatic sync capability · Load control capability · Fully configurable inputs for use as alarms or a range of different functions. · Engine ECU interface to electronic engines. · Direct connection to governor / AVR for synchronising and load sharing · R.O.C.O.F. and Vector shift for detection of mains failure when in parallel with the mains supply. Using a PC and the DSE Configuration Suite software allows alteration of selected operational sequences, timers and alarms. Additionally, the module’s integral fascia configuration editor allows adjustment of a subset of this information. A robust plastic case designed for front panel mounting houses the module. Connections are via locking plug and sockets. Selective operational sequences, timers and alarm trips can be altered by the customer via a PC using the DSE Configuration suite or via the integral front panel configuration editor. Access to critical operational sequences and timers for use by qualified engineers, can be protected by a security code. Module access can also be protected by PIN code. Selected parameters can be changed from the module’s front panel. The module is housed in a robust plastic case suitable for panel mounting. Connections to the module are via locking plug and sockets.
  • 9. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 9 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 PART NUMBERING 8620 - 002 - 01 Product type DSE 8620 AMF Automatic Mains Failure Controller and ATS Module 8620 Variant Standard version 01 Hardware revision Initial Release 002 At the time of this document production, there have been no revisions to the module hardware. 3.1.1 SHORT NAMES Short name Description DSE8000, All modules in the DSE8000 Series DSE8600,DSE86xx All modules in the DSE8600 sync/load share range DSE8620 DSE8620 module
  • 10. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 10 3.2 TERMINAL SPECIFICATION Connection type Two part connector. · Male part fitted to module · Female part supplied in module packing case - Screw terminal, rising clamp, no internal spring. Example showing cable entry and screw terminals of Minimum cable size 0.5mm² (AWG 24) a 10 way connector Maximum cable size 2.5mm² (AWG 10) NOTE: For purchasing additional connector plugs from DSE, please see the section entitled Maintenance, Spares, Repair and Servicing elsewhere in this document. 3.3 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS Minimum supply voltage 8V continuous Cranking dropouts Able to survive 0V for 50mS providing the supply was at least 10V before the dropout and recovers to 5V afterwards. Maximum supply voltage 35V continuous (60V protection) Reverse polarity protection -35V continuous Maximum operating current 300mA at 24V 600mA at 12V Maximum standby current 190mA at 24V 390mA at 12V Plant supply instrumentation display Range 0V-70V DC (note Maximum continuous operating voltage of 35V DC) Resolution 0.1V Accuracy 1% full scale (±0.7V) 3.4 GENERATOR VOLTAGE / FREQUENCY SENSING Measurement type True RMS conversion Sample Rate 5KHz or better Harmonics Up to 10th or better Input Impedance 300K W ph-N Phase to Neutral 15V (minimum required for sensing frequency) to 333V AC (absolute maximum) Suitable for 110V to 277V nominal (±20% for under/overvoltage detection) Phase to Phase 26V (minimum required for sensing frequency) to 576V AC (absolute maximum) Suitable for 190V ph-ph to 479V ph-ph nominal (±20% for under/overvoltage detection) Common mode offset from Earth 100V AC (max) Resolution 1V AC phase to neutral 2V AC phase to phase Accuracy ±1% of full scale phase to neutral ±2% of full scale phase to phase Minimum frequency 3.5Hz Maximum frequency 75.0Hz Frequency resolution 0.1Hz Frequency accuracy ±0.2Hz
  • 11. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 3.5 GENERATOR CURRENT SENSING Measurement type True RMS conversion Sample Rate 5KHz or better Harmonics Up to 10th or better Nominal CT secondary rating 1A or 5A (5A recommended) Maximum continuous current 5A Overload Measurement 3 x Nominal Range setting Absolute maximum overload 50A for 1 second Burden 0.5VA (0.02W current shunts) common mode offset ±2V peak plant ground to CT common terminal Resolution 0.5% of 5A Accuracy ±1% of Nominal (1A or 5A) (excluding CT error) 3.5.1 VA RATING OF THE CTS The VA burden of the DSE8620 module on the CTs is 0.5VA. However depending upon the type and length of cabling between the CTs and the DSE8620 module, CTs with a greater VA rating than the module are required. 11 The distance between the CTs and the measuring module should be estimated and cross-referenced against the chart opposite to find the VA burden of the cable itself. If the CTs are fitted within the alternator top box, the star point (common) of the CTs should be connected to system ground (earth) as close as possible to the CTs. This minimises the length of cable used to connect the CTs to the DSE module. Example. If 1.5mm² cable is used and the distance from the CT to the measuring module is 20m, then the burden of the cable alone is approximately 15VA. As the burden of the DSE controller is 0.5VA, then a CT with a rating of at least 15+0.5V = 15.5VA must be used. If 2.5mm² cables are used over the same distance of 20m, then the burden of the cable on the CT is approximately 7VA. CT’s required in this instance is at least 7.5VA (7+0.5). NOTE: - Details for 4mm² cables are shown for reference only. The connectors on the DSE modules are only suitable for cables up to 2.5mm². NOTE: - CTs with 5A secondary windings are recommended with DSE modules. 1A CTs can be used if necessary however, the resolution of the readings is 5 times better when using 5A CTs.
  • 12. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 12 3.5.2 CT POLARITY Take care to ensure the correct polarity of the CTs. Incorrect CT orientation will lead to negative kW readings when the set is supplying power. Take note that paper stick-on labels on CTs that show the orientation are often incorrectly placed on the CT (!). It is more reliable to use the labelling in the case moulding as an indicator to orientation (if available). To test orientation, run the generator in island mode (not in parallel with any other supply) and load the generator to around 10% of the set rating. Ensure the DSE module shows positive kW for all three individual phase readings. labelled as p1, k or K labelled as p2, l or L TO GENERATOR TO LOAD SWITCH DEVICE POLARITY OF CT PRIMARY NOTE:- Take care to ensure correct polarity of the CT primary as shown above. If in doubt, check with the CT supplier. 3.5.3 CT PHASING Take particular care that the CTs are connected to the correct phases. For instance, ensure that the CT on phase 1 is connected to the terminal on the DSE module intended for connection to the CT for phase 1. Additionally ensure that the voltage sensing for phase 1 is actually connected to generator phase 1. Incorrect connection of the phases as described above will result in incorrect power factor (pf) measurements, which in turn results in incorrect kW measurements. One way to check for this is to make use of a single-phase load. Place the load on each phase in turn, run the generator and ensure the kW value appears in the correct phase. For instance if the load is connected to phase 3, ensure the kW figure appears in phase 3 display and not in the display for phase 1 or 2. 3.5.4 CT CLASS Ensure the correct CT type is chosen. For instance if the DSE module is providing overcurrent protection, ensure the CT is capable of measuring the overload level you wish to protect against, and at the accuracy level you require. For instance, this may mean fitting a protection class CT (P10 type) to maintain high accuracy while the CT is measuring overload currents. Conversely, if the DSE module is using the CT for instrumentation only (current protection is disabled or not fitted to the controller), then measurement class CTs can be used. Again, bear in mind the accuracy you require. The DSE module is accurate to better than 1% of the full-scale current reading. To maintain this accuracy you should fit Class 0.5 or Class 1 CTs. You should check with your CT manufacturer for further advice on selecting your CTs
  • 13. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 13 3.6 INPUTS 3.6.1 DIGITAL INPUTS Number 11 configurable inputs Arrangement Contact between terminal and ground Low level threshold 2.1V minimum High level threshold 6.6V maximum Maximum input voltage +50V DC with respect to plant supply negative Minimum input voltage -24V DC with respect to plant supply negative Contact wetting current 7mA typical Open circuit voltage 12V typical 3.6.1 ANALOGUE INPUTS Oil Pressure (Configurable if engine ECU link provides oil pressure measurement) Measurement type Resistance measurement by measuring voltage across sensor with a fixed current applied Arrangement Differential resistance measurement input Measurement current 15mA Full scale 240W Over range / fail 270W Resolution 0.1 Bar (1-2 PSI) Accuracy ±2% of full scale resistance (±4.8W) excluding transducer error Max common mode voltage ±2V Display range 13.7 bar (0-200 PSI) subject to limits of the sensor Coolant Temperature (Configurable if engine ECU link provides coolant temp measurement) Measurement type Resistance measurement by measuring voltage across sensor with a fixed current applied Arrangement Differential resistance measurement input Measurement current 10mA Full scale 480W Over range / fail 540W Resolution 1°C (2°F) Accuracy +/-2% of full scale resistance (±9.6W) excluding transducer error Max common mode ±2V voltage Display range 0°C -140°C (32°F - 284°F) subject to limits of the sensor Fuel Level Measurement type Resistance measurement by measuring voltage across sensor with a fixed current applied Arrangement Differential resistance measurement input Measurement current 10mA Full scale 480W Over range / fail 540W Resolution 1°C (2°F) Accuracy +/-2% of full scale resistance (±9.6W) excluding transducer error Max common mode ±2V voltage Display range 0-250%
  • 14. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 14 Flexible sensor Number 2 Measurement type Resistance measurement by measuring voltage across sensor with a fixed current applied Arrangement Differential resistance measurement input Measurement current 10mA Full scale 480W Over range / fail 540W Resolution 1% Accuracy ±2% of full scale resistance (±9.6W) excluding transducer error Max common mode voltage ±2V Display range 0-250% 3.6.2 CHARGE FAIL INPUT Minimum voltage 0V Maximum voltage 35V (plant supply) Resolution 0.2V Accuracy ± 1% of max measured voltage Excitation Active circuit constant power output Output Power 2.5W Nominal @12V and 24V Current at 12V 210mA Current at 24V 105mA The charge fail input is actually a combined input and output. Whenever the generator is required to run, the terminal provides excitation current to the charge alternator field winding. When the charge alternator is correctly charging the battery, the voltage of the terminal is close to the plant battery supply voltage. In a failed charge situation, the voltage of this terminal is pulled down to a low voltage. It is this drop in voltage that triggers the charge failure alarm. The level at which this operates and whether this triggers a warning or shutdown alarm is configurable using the DSE Config Suite Software. 3.6.3 MAGNETIC PICKUP Type Single ended input, capacitive coupled Minimum voltage 0.5V RMS Max common mode voltage ±2V Maximum voltage Clamped to ±70V by transient suppressers, dissipation not to exceed 1W. Maximum frequency 10,000Hz Resolution 6.25 RPM Accuracy ±25 RPM Flywheel teeth 10 to 500 NOTE : DSE can supply a suitable magnetic pickup device, available in two body thread lengths : DSE Part number 020-012 - Magnetic Pickup probe 5/8 UNF 2½” thread length DSE Part number 020-013 - Magnetic Pickup probe 5/8 UNF 4” thread length Magnetic Pickup devices can often be ‘shared’ between two or more devices. For example, one device can often supply the signal to both the DSE8600 series module and the engine governor. The possibility of this depends upon the amount of current that the magnetic pickup can supply.
  • 15. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual DSE output drives the contactor coil, via external slave relay if required. When the DSE module requires the contactor closed, the output energises (closing the internal relay) When the DSE module requires the contactor to be open, the output is de-energised (opening the internal relay) 15 3.7 OUTPUTS Ten (10) digital outputs are fitted to the DSE8620 controller. Additional outputs are provided for by adding up to ten (10) external relay boards (DSE2157). This allows for up to 80 additional digital outputs. 3.7.1 OUTPUTS A & B Type Normally used for Fuel / Start outputs. Fully configurable for other purposes if the module is configured to control an electronic engine. Supplied from Emergency Stop terminal 3. Rating 15A resistive @ 35V 3.7.2 CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS C & D (LOAD SWITCHING) Type Fully configurable volts free relays. Output C – Normally Closed, Output D – Normally Open Rating 8A resistive@ 250V AC Protection Protected against over current & over temperature. Built in load dump feature. Contactor coils Use output D, the normally open relay: Generator Undervoltage (UV coils) Use output C, the normally closed relay : Generator DSE output drives the UV coil, via external slave relay if required. When the generator starts, the UV is powered via the normally closed relay. The breaker is now ready for the close signal to be given. When the breaker is to be opened, the Open Generator Pulse relay is operated, removing power from the UV coil for one second. This causes the breaker to trip (open) as the UV is no longer powered. The Open Generator Pulse relay switches back to its closed state, ready to power the UV coil the next time the generator starts.
  • 16. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual When the DSE module requires the breaker closed, the output energises (closing the internal relay) for the period of the Breaker Close Pulse timer after which the output is de-energised (opening the internal relay). When the DSE module requires the breaker open, the output energises (closing the internal relay). When the DSE module requires the breaker open, the output energises (closing the internal relay) for the period of the breaker trip pulse. 16 Closing coils For continuous closing signals (close signal is present continuously when the breaker is closed), follow the instructions above as for Contactor Coils. For momentary (pulsed) closing signals, use OUTPUT D, the normally open relay: Generator Opening coils / Shunt Trip coils For Continuous opening signal, use output D, the normally open relay: Generator: For momentary (pulsed) closing signals, use a normally open relay: Generator: 3.7.1 OUTPUTS E,F,G,H, I ,J & K Number 7 Type Fully configurable, supplied from DC supply terminal 2. Rating 3A resistive @ 35V
  • 17. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 17 3.8 COMMUNICATION PORTS USB Port USB2.0 Device for connection to PC running DSE configuration suite only Max distance 6m (yards) Serial Communication RS232 and RS485 are both fitted but and provide independent operation RS232 Serial port Non – Isolated port Max Baud rate 115K baud subject to S/W TX, RX, RTS, CTS, DSR, DTR, DCD Male 9 way D type connector Max distance 15m (50 feet) RS485 Serial port Isolated Data connection 2 wire + common Half Duplex Data direction control for Transmit (by s/w protocol) Max Baud Rate 19200 External termination required (120W) Max common mode offset 70V (on board protection transorb) Max distance 1.2km (¾ mile) CAN Port Engine CAN Port Standard implementation of ‘Slow mode’, up to 250K bits/s Non-Isolated. Internal Termination provided (120W) Max distance 40m (133 feet) Ethernet Auto detecting 10/100 Ethernet port. 3.9 COMMUNICATION PORT USAGE 3.9.1 CAN INTERFACE Modules are fitted with the CAN interface as standard and are capable of receiving engine data from engine CAN controllers compliant with the CAN standard. CAN enabled engine controllers monitor the engine’s operating parameters such as engine speed, oil pressure, engine temperature (among others) in order to closely monitor and control the engine. The industry standard communications interface (CAN) transports data gathered by the engine controller interface. This allows generator controllers such as the DSE8600 series to access these engine parameters with no physical connection to the sensor device. NOTE:- For further details for connections to CAN enabled engines and the functions available with each engine type, refer to the manual Electronic Engines and DSE Wiring. Part No. 057-004
  • 18. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 18 3.9.2 USB CONNECTION The USB port is provided to give a simple means of connection between a PC and the DSE8600 series controller. Using the DSE Configuration Suite Software, the operator is then able to control the module, starting or stopping the generator, selecting operating modes, etc. Additionally, the various operating parameters (such as output volts, oil pressure, etc.) of the remote generator are available to be viewed or changed. To connect a DSE8600 series module to a PC by USB, the following items are required: · DSE8600 series module · DSE 8600 series configuration software (Supplied on configuration suite software CD or available from www.deepseaplc.com). · USB cable Type A to Type B. (This is the same cable as often used between a PC and a USB printer) DSE can supply this cable if required : PC Configuration interface lead (USB type A – type B) DSE Part No 016-125 NOTE:- The DC supply must be connected to the module for configuration by PC. NOTE:- Refer to DSE8600 series Configuration Suite Manual (DSE part 057-119) for further details on configuring, monitoring and control. 3.9.3 USB HOST-MASTER (USB DRIVE CONNECTION) Capability to add USB Host facility for USB ‘Pen drive’ type interface for data recording Connector Type A. For data logging max maximum size 16Gb.(see viewing the instrument pages) NOTE:- Refer to DSE8600 series Configuration Suite Manual (DSE part 057-119) for further details on configuring, monitoring and control.
  • 19. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 19 3.9.4 RS232 The RS232 port on the DSE8600 series controller supports the Modbus RTU protocol. The Gencomm register table for the controller is available upon request from the DSE Technical Support Department. RS232 is for short distance communication (max 15m) and is typically used to connect the DSE86xx series controller to a telephone or GSM modem for more remote communications. Many PCs are not fitted with an internal RS232 serial port. DSE DOES NOT recommend the use of USB to RS232 convertors but can recommend PC add-ons to provide the computer with an RS232 port. Recommended PC Serial Port add-ons (for computers without internal RS232 port): Remember to check these parts are suitable for your PC. Consult your PC supplier for further advice. · Brainboxes PM143 PCMCIA RS232 card (for laptop PCs) · Brainboxes VX-001 Express Card RS232 (for laptops and nettops PCs) · Brainboxes UC246 PCI RS232 card (for desktop PCs) · Brainboxes PX-246 PCI Express 1 Port RS232 1 x 9 Pin (for desktop PCs) Supplier: Brainboxes Tel: +44 (0)151 220 2500 Web: http://www.brainboxes.com Email: Sales:sales@brainboxes.com NB DSE Have no business tie to Brainboxes. Over many years, our own engineers have used these products and are happy to recommend them.
  • 20. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 20 RECOMMENDED EXTERNAL MODEMS: · Multitech Global Modem – MultiModem ZBA (PSTN) DSE Part Number 020-252 (Contact DSE Sales for details of localisation kits for these modems) · Wavecom Fastrak Supreme GSM modem kit (PSU, Antenna and modem)* DSE Part number 0830-001-01 · Brodersen GSM Industrial Modem* DSE Part number 020-245 NOTE: *For GSM modems a SIM card is required, supplied by your GSM network provider : · For SMS only, a ‘normal’ voice SIM card is required. This enables the controller to send SMS messages to designated mobile phones upon status and alarm conditions. · For a data connection to a PC running DSE Configuration Suite Software, a ‘special’ CSD (Circuit Switched Data) SIM card is required that will enable the modem to answer an incoming data call. Many ‘pay as you go’ services will not provide a CSD (Circuit Switched Data) SIM card.
  • 21. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 21 3.9.5 RS485 The RS485 port on the DSE8600 series controller supports the Modbus RTU protocol. The DSE Gencomm register table for the controller is available upon request from the DSE Technical Support Department. RS485 is used for point-to-point cable connection of more than one device (maximum 32 devices) and allows for connection to PCs, PLCs and Building Management Systems (to name just a few devices). One advantage of the RS485 interface is the large distance specification (1.2km when using Belden 9841 (or equivalent) cable. This allows for a large distance between the DSE8600 series module and a PC running the DSE Configuration Suite software. The operator is then able to control the module, starting or stopping the generator, selecting operating modes, etc. The various operating parameters (such as output volts, oil pressure, etc.) of the remote generator can be viewed or changed. NOTE:- For a single module to PC connection and distances up to 6m (8yds) the USB connection method is more suitable and provides for a lower cost alternative to RS485 (which is more suited to longer distance connections). Recommended PC Serial Port add-ons (for computers without internal RS485 port). Remember to check these parts are suitable for your PC. Consult your PC supplier for further advice. · Brainboxes PM154 PCMCIA RS485 card (for laptops PCs) Set to ‘Half Duplex, Autogating” with ‘CTS True’ set to ‘enabled’ · Brainboxes VX-023 ExpressCard 1 Port RS422/485 (for laptops and nettop PCs) · Brainboxes UC320 PCI Velocity RS485 card (for desktop PCs) Set to ‘Half Duplex, Autogating” with ‘CTS True’ set to ‘enabled’ · Brainboxes PX-324 PCI Express 1 Port RS422/485 (for desktop PCs) Supplier: Brainboxes Tel: +44 (0)151 220 2500 Web: http://www.brainboxes.com Email: Sales:sales@brainboxes.com NB DSE have no business tie to Brainboxes. Over many years,our own engineers have used these products and are happy to recommend them.
  • 22. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 22 3.9.6 ETHERNET The DSE8620 is fitted with ETHERNET socket for connection to LAN (local area networks) Description 1 TX+ 2 TX- 3 RX+ 4 Do not connect 5 Do not connect 6 RX- 7 Do not connect 8 Do not connect 3.9.6.1 DIRECT PC CONNECTION Requirements · DSE8620 · Crossover Ethernet cable (see Below) · PC with Ethernet port and Windows Internet Explorer 6 or above, Firefox Crossover network cable
  • 23. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 23 Crossover cable wiring detail Two pairs crossed, two pairs uncrossed 10baseT/100baseTX crossover Pin Connection 1 (T568A) Connection 2 (T568B) 1 white/green stripe white/orange stripe 2 green solid orange solid 3 white/orange stripe white/green stripe 4 blue solid blue solid 5 white/blue stripe white/blue stripe 6 orange solid green solid 7 white/brown stripe white/brown stripe 8 brown solid brown solid NOTE:- This cable can be purchased from any good PC or IT store. 3.9.6.2 CONNECTION TO BASIC ETHERNET Requirements For the advanced Engineer, a crossover cable is a CAT5 cable with one end terminated as T568A and the other end terminated as T568B. · DSE8620 · Ethernet cable (see below) · Working Ethernet (company or home network) · PC with Ethernet port and Windows Internet Explorer 6 or above, Firefox Ethernet router or ADSL router Ethernet cable
  • 24. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual Ethernet cable wiring detail . 10baseT/100baseT Pin Connection 1 (T568A) Connection 2 (T568A) 1 white/green stripe white/green stripe 2 green solid green solid 3 white/orange stripe white/orange stripe 4 blue solid blue solid 5 white/blue stripe white/blue stripe 6 orange solid orange solid 7 white/brown stripe white/brown stripe 8 brown solid brown solid For the advanced Engineer, this cable has both ends terminated as T568A (as shown below) or T568B. NOTE:- DSE Stock a 2m (2yds) Ethernet Cable – Part number 016-137. Alternatively they can be purchased from any good PC or IT store. 3.9.6.3 CONNECTION TO COMPANY INFRASTRUCTURE ETHERNET 24 Requirements · DSE8620 · Ethernet cable (see below) · Working Ethernet (company or home network) · PC with Ethernet port and Windows Internet Explorer 6 or above, Firefox Ethernet cable PC Network wall connection sockets Ethernet router or ADSL router
  • 25. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual Ethernet cable wiring detail 10baseT/100baseT Pin Connection 1 (T568A) Connection 2 (T568A) 1 white/green stripe white/green stripe 2 green solid green solid 3 white/orange stripe white/orange stripe 4 blue solid blue solid 5 white/blue stripe white/blue stripe 6 orange solid orange solid 7 white/brown stripe white/brown stripe 8 brown solid brown solid NOTE:- DSE Stock a 2m (2yds) Ethernet Cable – Part number 016-137. Alternatively they can be purchased from any good PC or IT store. 25 3.9.6.4 CONNECTION TO THE INTERNET Requirements · Ethernet cable (see below) · Working Ethernet (company or home network) · Working Internet connection (ADSL or DSL recommended) For the advanced Engineer, this cable has both ends terminated as T568A (as shown below) or T568B. Ethernet cable DSL or ADSL router Optional ‘Local’ site PC INTERNET DSL or ADSL router PC remote from generator site The DSL/ADSL router will route external network traffic.
  • 26. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 26 Ethernet cable wiring detail 10baseT/100baseT Pin Connection 1 (T568A) Connection 2 (T568A) 1 white/green stripe white/green stripe 2 green solid green solid 3 white/orange stripe white/orange stripe 4 blue solid blue solid 5 white/blue stripe white/blue stripe 6 orange solid orange solid 7 white/brown stripe white/brown stripe 8 brown solid brown solid NOTE:- DSE Stock a 2m (2yds) Ethernet Cable – Part number 016-137. Alternatively they can be purchased from any good PC or IT store. For the advanced Engineer, this cable has both ends terminated as T568A (as shown below) or T568B.
  • 27. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 27 Firewall configuration for internet access As modem/routers differ enormously in their configuration, it is not possible for DSE to give a complete guide to their use with the DSE8620. However it is possible to give a description of the requirements in generic terms. For details of how to achieve the connection to your modem/router you are referred to the supplier of your modem/router equipment. The DSE8620 makes its data available over Modbus TCP and as such communicates over the Ethernet using a Port configured via the DSE config suite software.. You must configure your modem/router to allow inbound traffic on this port. For more information you are referred to your WAN interface device (modem/router) manufacturer. It is also important to note that if the port assigned (setting from software “Modbus Port Number”) is already in use on the LAN, the DSE8620 cannot be used and another port must be used . Outgoing Firewall rule As the DSE8620 makes its user interface available to standard web browsers, all communication uses the chosen port. It is usual for a firewall to make the same port outgoing open for communication. Incoming traffic (virtual server) Network Address and Port Translation (NAPT) allows a single device, such as the modem/router gateway, to act as an agent between the Internet (or "public external network") and a local (or "internal private") network. This means that only a single, unique IP address is required to represent an entire group of computers. For our DSE8620 application, this means that the WAN IP address of the modem/router is the IP address we need to access the site from an external (internet) location. When requests reaches the modem/router, we want this passed to a ‘virtual server’ for handling, in our case this is the DSE8620 module. Result : Traffic arriving from the WAN (internet) on port xxx is automatically sent to IP address set within the configuration software on the LAN (DSE8620) for handling. NOTE:- Refer to DSE8600 series Configuration Suite Manual (DSE part 057-119) for further details on configuring, monitoring and control.
  • 28. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 3.10 DSENET® FOR EXPANSION MODULES DSENet® is the interconnection cable between the host controller and the expansion module(s) and must not be connect to any device other than DSE equipment designed for connection to the DSENet® Cable type Two core screened twisted pair Cable characteristic impedance 120W Recommended cable Belden 9841 28 Belden 9271 Maximum cable length 1200m (¾ mile) when using Belden 9841 or direct equivalent. 600m (666 yds) when using Belden 9271 or direct equivalent. DSENet® topology “Daisy Chain” Bus with no stubs (spurs) DSENet® termination 120W. Fitted internally to host controller. Must be fitted externally to the ‘last’ expansion module by the customer. Maximum expansion modules Total 20 devices made up of DSE2130 (up to 4), DSE2157 (up to 10), DSE2548 (up to 10) This gives the possibility of : Maximum 80 additional relay outputs Maximum 80 additional LED indicators Maximum 32 additional inputs (16 of which can be analogue inputs if required) NOTE: As a termination resistor is internally fitted to the host controller, the host controller must be the ‘first’ unit on the DSENet®. A termination resistor MUST be fitted to the ‘last’ unit on the DSENet®. For connection details, you are referred to the section entitled ‘typical wiring diagram’ elsewhere in this document. NOTE : DSE8600 series does not support the 2510/2520 display modules. 3.10.1 DSENET® USED FOR MODBUS ENGINE CONNECTION As DSENet® utilises an RS485 hardware interface, this port can be configured for connection to Cummins Modbus engines (Engines fitted with Cummins GCS). This leaves the RS485 interface free for connection to remote monitoring equipment (i.e. Building Management System, PLC or PC RS485 port). While this is a very useful feature in some applications, the obvious drawback is that the DSENet® interface is no longer available for connection to expansion devices. Example of configuring the DSENet® for connection to Cummins QST GCS using the DSE Configuration Suite Software:
  • 29. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 29 3.11 SOUNDER DSE8600 Series features an internal sounder to draw attention to warning, shutdown and electrical trip alarms. Sounder level 64db @ 1m 3.11.1 ADDING AN EXTERNAL SOUNDER TO THE APPLICATION Should an external alarm or indicator be required, this can be achieved by using the DSE Configuration Suite PC software to configure an auxiliary output for “Audible Alarm”, and by configuring an auxiliary input for “Alarm Mute” (if required). The audible alarm output activates and de-activates at the same time as the module’s internal sounder. The Alarm mute input and internal alarm mute button activate ‘in parallel’ with each other. Either signal will mute both the internal sounder and audible alarm output. Example of configuration to achieve external sounder with external alarm mute button: 3.12 ACCUMULATED INSTRUMENTATION NOTE: When an accumulated instrumentation value exceeds the maximum number as listed below, it will reset and begin counting from zero again. Engine hours run Maximum 99999 hrs 59 minutes (approximately 11yrs 4months) Number of starts 1,000,000 (1 million) The number of logged Engine Hours and Number of Starts can be set/reset using the DSE Configuration Suite PC software. Depending upon module configuration, this may have been PIN number locked by your generator supplier
  • 30. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 30 3.13 DIMENSIONS AND MOUNTING 3.13.1 DIMENSIONS 240.0mm x 181.1mm x 41.7mm (9.4” x 7.1” x 1.6”) PANEL CUTOUT 220mm x 160mm (8.7” x 6.3”) WEIGHT 0.7kg (1.4lb)
  • 31. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 31 3.13.2 FIXING CLIPS The module is held into the panel fascia using the supplied fixing clips. · Withdraw the fixing clip screw (turn anticlockwise) until only the pointed end is protruding from the clip. · Insert the three ‘prongs’ of the fixing clip into the slots in the side of the 8000 series module case. · Pull the fixing clip backwards (towards the back of the module) ensuring all three prongs of the clip are inside their allotted slots. · Turn the fixing clip screws clockwise until they make contact with the panel fascia. · Turn the screws a little more to secure the module into the panel fascia. Care should be taken not to over tighten the fixing clip screws. Fixing clip NOTE:- In conditions of excessive vibration, mount the module on suitable anti-vibration mountings. Fixing clip fitted to module
  • 32. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 32 3.13.3 CABLE TIE FIXING POINTS Integral cable tie fixing points are included on the rear of the module’s case to aid wiring. This additionally provides strain relief to the cable loom by removing the weight of the loom from the screw connectors, thus reducing the chance of future connection failures. Care should be taken not to over tighten the cable tie (for instance with cable tie tools) to prevent the risk of damage to the module case. Cable tie fixing point With cable and tie in place 3.13.4 SILICON SEALING GASKET The supplied silicon gasket provides improved sealing between the 8000 series module and the panel fascia. The gasket is fitted to the module before installation into the panel fascia. Take care to ensure the gasket is correctly fitted to the module to maintain the integrity of the seal. Sealing gasket Gasket fitted to module
  • 33. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 33 3.14 APPLICABLE STANDARDS BS 4884-1 This document conforms to BS4884-1 1992 Specification for presentation of essential information. BS 4884-2 This document conforms to BS4884-2 1993 Guide to content BS 4884-3 This document conforms to BS4884-3 1993 Guide to presentation BS EN 60068-2-1 -30°C (-22°F) (Minimum temperature) BS EN 60068-2-2 (Maximum temperature) +70°C (158°F) BS EN 60950 Safety of information technology equipment, including electrical business equipment BS EN 61000-6-2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard (Industrial) BS EN 61000-6-4 EMC Generic Emission Standard (Industrial) BS EN 60529 (Degrees of protection provided by enclosures) IP65 (front of module when installed into the control panel with the supplied sealing gasket) IP42 (front of module when installed into the control panel WITHOUT being sealed to the panel) UL508 NEMA rating (Approximate) 12 (Front of module when installed into the control panel with the supplied sealing gasket). 2 (Front of module when installed into the control panel WITHOUT being sealed to the panel) IEEE C37.2 (Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers and Contact Designations) Under the scope of IEEE 37.2, function numbers can also be used to represent functions in microprocessor devices and software programs. The 8000 series controller is device number 11L-8000 (Multifunction device protecting Line (generator) – 8620 series module). As the module is configurable by the generator OEM, the functions covered by the module will vary. Under the module’s factory configuration, the device numbers included within the module are : 2 – Time delay starting or closing relay 6 –Starting circuit breaker 27AC – AC undervoltage relay 27DC – DC undervoltage relay 30 – annunciator relay 42 – Running circuit breaker 50 – instantaneous overcurrent relay 51 – ac time overcurrent relay 52 – ac circuit breaker 59AC – AC overvoltage relay 59DC – DC overvoltage relay 62 – time delay stopping or opening relay 63 – pressure switch 74– alarm relay 81 – frequency relay 86 – lockout relay In line with our policy of continual development, Deep Sea Electronics, reserve the right to change specification without notice.
  • 34. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 34 3.14.1 ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATIONS IP CLASSIFICATIONS 8600 series specification under BS EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures IP65 (Front of module when module is installed into the control panel with the optional sealing gasket). IP42 (front of module when module is installed into the control panel WITHOUT being sealed to the panel) First Digit Second Digit Protection against contact and ingress of solid objects Protection against ingress of water 0 No protection 0 No protection 1 Protected against ingress solid objects with a diameter of more than 50 mm. No protection against deliberate access, e.g. with a hand, but large surfaces of the body are prevented from approach. 1 Protection against dripping water falling vertically. No harmful effect must be produced (vertically falling drops). 2 Protected against penetration by solid objects with a diameter of more than 12 mm. Fingers or similar objects prevented from approach. 2 Protection against dripping water falling vertically. There must be no harmful effect when the equipment (enclosure) is tilted at an angle up to 15° from its normal pos ition (drops falling at an angle). 3 Protected against ingress of solid objects with a diameter of more than 2.5 mm. Tools, wires etc. with a thickness of more than 2.5 mm are prevented from approach. 3 Protection against water falling at any angle up to 60° from the vertical. There must be no harmful effect (spray water). 4 Protected against ingress of solid objects with a diameter of more than 1 mm. Tools, wires etc. with a thickness of more than 1 mm are prevented from approach. 4 Protection against water splashed against the equipment (enclosure) from any direction. There must be no harmful effect (splashing water). 5 Protected against harmful dust deposits. Ingress of dust is not totally prevented but the dust must not enter in sufficient quantity to interface with satisfactory operation of the equipment. Complete protection against contact. 5 Protection against water projected from a nozzle against the equipment (enclosure) from any direction. There must be no harmful effect (water jet). 6 Protection against ingress of dust (dust tight). Complete protection against contact. 6 Protection against heavy seas or powerful water jets. Water must not enter the equipment (enclosure) in harmful quantities (splashing over).
  • 35. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 35 3.14.2 NEMA CLASSIFICATIONS 8600 series NEMA Rating (Approximate) 12 (Front of module when module is installed into the control panel with the optional sealing gasket). 2 (front of module when module is installed into the control panel WITHOUT being sealed to the panel) NOTE: - There is no direct equivalence between IP / NEMA ratings. IP figures shown are approximate only. 1 IP30 Provides a degree of protection against contact with the enclosure equipment and against a limited amount of falling dirt. 2 IP31 Provides a degree of protection against limited amounts of falling water and dirt. 3 IP64 Provides a degree of protection against windblown dust, rain and sleet; undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. 3R IP32 Provides a degree of protection against rain and sleet:; undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. 4 (X) IP66 Provides a degree of protection against splashing water, windblown dust and rain, hose directed water; undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. (Resist corrosion). 12/12K IP65 Provides a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt and dripping non corrosive liquids. 13 IP65 Provides a degree of protection against dust and spraying of water, oil and non corrosive coolants.
  • 36. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual Terminals 39-46 Terminals 47-50 Terminals 51-57 Terminals 60-68 36 4 INSTALLATION The DSE8xxx Series module is designed to be mounted on the panel fascia. For dimension and mounting details, see the section entitled Specification, Dimension and mounting elsewhere in this document. 4.1 TERMINAL DESCRIPTION To aid user connection, icons are used on the rear of the module to help identify terminal functions. An example of this is shown below. NOTE : Availability of some terminals depends upon module version. Full details are given in the section entitled Terminal Description elsewhere in this manual. Terminals 1-13 Terminals 15-19 Terminals 22-36 USB (B) PC configuration connection. USB Serial and part number label Ethernet
  • 37. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 4.1.1 DC SUPPLY, FUEL AND START OUTPUTS, OUTPUTS E-J 37 PIN No DESCRIPTION CABLE SIZE NOTES 1 DC Plant Supply Input (Negative) 2.5mm² AWG 13 2 DC Plant Supply Input (Positive) 2.5 mm² AWG 13 (Recommended Maximum Fuse 15A anti-surge) Supplies the module (2A anti-surge requirement) and Output relays E,F,G & H 3 Emergency Stop Input 2.5mm² AWG 13 Plant Supply Positive. Also supplies outputs 1 & 2. (Recommended Maximum Fuse 20A) 4 Output relay A (FUEL) 2.5mm² AWG 13 Plant Supply Positive from terminal 3. 15 Amp rated. Fixed as FUEL relay if electronic engine is not configured. 5 Output relay B (START) 2.5mm² AWG 13 Plant Supply Positive from terminal 3. 15 Amp rated. Fixed as START relay if electronic engine is not configured. 6 Charge fail / excite 2.5mm² AWG 13 Do not connect to ground (battery negative). If charge alternator is not fitted, leave this terminal disconnected. 7 Functional Earth 2.5mm² AWG 13 Connect to a good clean earth point. 8 Output relay E 1.0mm² AWG 18 Plant Supply Positive from terminal 2. 3 Amp rated. 9 Output relay F 1.0mm² AWG 18 Plant Supply Positive from terminal 2. 3 Amp rated. 10 Output relay G 1.0mm² AWG 18 Plant Supply Positive. from terminal 2. 3 Amp rated. 11 Output relay H 1.0mm² AWG 18 Plant Supply Positive from terminal 2. 3 Amp rated. 12 Output relay I 1.0mm² AWG 18 Plant Supply Positive from terminal 2. 3 Amp rated. 13 Output relay J 1.0mm² AWG 18 Plant Supply Positive from terminal 2. 3 Amp rated. NOTE:- Terminal 14 is not fitted to the DSE 8620 controller. NOTE:- When the module is configured for operation with an electronic engine, FUEL and START output requirements may be different. Refer to Electronic Engines and DSE Wiring for further information. Part No. 057-004.
  • 38. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 38 4.1.2 ANALOGUE SENSOR PIN No DESCRIPTION CABLE SIZE NOTES 15 Sensor Common Return 0.5mm² AWG 20 Return feed for sensors* 16 Oil Pressure Input 0.5mm² AWG 20 Connect to Oil pressure sensor 17 Coolant Temperature Input 0.5mm² AWG 20 Connect to Coolant Temperature sensor 18 Fuel Level input 0.5mm² AWG 20 Connect to Fuel Level sensor 19 Flexible sensor 0.5mm² AWG 20 Connect to additional sensor (user configurable) NOTE:- Terminals 20 and 21 are not fitted to the 8600 series controller. NOTE: - It is VERY important that terminal 15 (sensor common) is soundly connected to an earth point on the ENGINE BLOCK, not within the control panel, and must be a sound electrical connection to the sensor bodies. This connection MUST NOT be used to provide an earth connection for other terminals or devices. The simplest way to achieve this is to run a SEPARATE earth connection from the system earth star point, to terminal 15 directly, and not use this earth for other connections. NOTE: - If you use PTFE insulating tape on the sensor thread when using earth return sensors, ensure you do not insulate the entire thread, as this will prevent the sensor body from being earthed via the engine block.
  • 39. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 4.1.3 MAGNETIC PICKUP, CAN AND EXPANSION 39 PIN No DESCRIPTION CABLE SIZE NOTES 22 Magnetic pickup Positive 0.5mm² AWG 20 Connect to Magnetic Pickup device 23 Magnetic pickup Negative 0.5mm² AWG 20 Connect to Magnetic Pickup device 24 Magnetic pickup screen Shield Connect to ground at one end only 25 CAN port H 0.5mm² AWG 20 Use only 120W CAN approved cable 26 CAN port L 0.5mm² AWG 20 Use only 120W CAN approved cable 27 CAN port Common 0.5mm² AWG 20 Use only 120W CAN approved cable 28 DSENet expansion + 0.5mm² AWG 20 Use only 120W RS485 approved cable 29 DSENet expansion - 0.5mm² AWG 20 Use only 120W RS485 approved cable 30 DSENet expansion SCR 0.5mm² AWG 20 Use only 120W RS485 approved cable MSC 31 Multiset Comms (MSC) Link H 0.5mm² AWG 20 Use only 120W RS485 approved cable 32 Multiset Comms (MSC) Link L 0.5mm² AWG 20 Use only 120W RS485 approved cable 33 Multiset Comms (MSC) Link SCR 0.5mm² AWG 20 Use only 120W RS485 approved cable GOV 34 Analogue Governor Output B 0.5mm² AWG 20 35 Analogue Governor Output A 0.5mm² AWG 20 AVR 37 Analogue AVR Output B 0.5mm² AWG 20 38 Analogue AVR Output A 0.5mm² AWG 20 NOTE:- Terminal 36 is not fitted to the 8620 controller NOTE:- Screened cable must be used for connecting the Magnetic Pickup, ensuring that the screen is earthed at one end ONLY. NOTE:- Screened 120W impedance cable specified for use with CAN must be used for the CAN link and the Multiset comms link. DSE stock and supply Belden cable 9841 which is a high quality 120W impedance cable suitable for CAN use (DSE part number 016-030) NOTE:- When the module is configured for CAN operation, terminals 22, 23 & 24 should be left unconnected. Engine speed is transmitted to the 8620 series controller on the CAN link. Refer to Electronic Engines and DSE Wiring for further information. Part No. 057-004.
  • 40. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 4.1.4 V1 LOAD SWITCHING AND GENERATOR VOLTAGE SENSING 40 PIN No DESCRIPTION CABLE SIZE NOTES 39 Output relay C 1.0mm AWG 18 Normally configured to control mains contactor coil (Recommend 10A fuse) 40 Output relay C 1.0mm AWG 18 Normally configured to control mains contactor coil 41 Output relay D 1.0mm AWG 18 Normally configured to control generator contactor coil (Recommend 10A fuse) 42 Output relay D 1.0mm AWG 18 Normally configured to control generator contactor coil V1 43 Generator L1 (U) voltage monitoring 1.0mm² AWG 18 Connect to generator L1 (U) output (AC) (Recommend 2A fuse) 44 Generator L2 (V) voltage monitoring input 1.0mm² AWG 18 Connect to generator L2 (V) output (AC) (Recommend 2A fuse) 45 Generator L3 (W) voltage monitoring input 1.0mm² AWG 18 Connect to generator L3 (W) output (AC) (Recommend 2A fuse) 46 Generator Neutral (N) input 1.0mm² AWG 18 Connect to generator Neutral terminal (AC) NOTE:- The above table describes connections to a three phase, four wire alternator. For alternative wiring topologies, please see the ALTERNATIVE AC TOPOLOGIES section of this manual. 4.1.5 V2 MAINS VOLTAGE SENSING PIN No DESCRIPTION CABLE SIZE NOTES V2 47 Mains L1 (R) voltage monitoring 1.0mm AWG 18 Connect to Mains L1 (R) incoming supply (AC) (Recommend 2A fuse) 48 Mains L2 (S) voltage monitoring 1.0mm AWG 18 Connect to Mains L1 (S) incoming supply (AC) (Recommend 2A fuse) 49 Mains L3 (T) voltage monitoring 1.0mm AWG 18 Connect to Mains L1 (T) incoming supply (AC) (Recommend 2A fuse) 50 Mains Neutral (N) input 1.0mm AWG 18 Connect to Mains N incoming supply (AC)
  • 41. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 4.1.6 GENERATOR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS WARNING!:- Do not disconnect this plug when the CTs are carrying current. Disconnection will open circuit the secondary of the C.T.’s and dangerous voltages may then develop. Always ensure the CTs are not carrying current and the CTs are short circuit connected before making or breaking connections to the module. NOTE:- The DSE8620 module has a burden of 0.5VA on the CT. Ensure the CT is rated for the burden of the DSE 8620 controller, the cable length being used and any other equipment sharing the CT. If in doubt, consult your CT supplier. 41 PIN No DESCRIPTION CABLE SIZE NOTES 51 CT Secondary for Gen L1 2.5mm² AWG 13 Connect to s1 secondary of L1 monitoring CT 52 CT Secondary for Gen L2 2.5mm² AWG 13 Connect to s1 secondary of L2 monitoring CT 53 CT Secondary for Gen L3 2.5mm² AWG 13 Connect to s1 secondary of L3 monitoring CT Connection to terminals 54 & 55 The function of terminals 54 and 55 change position depending upon wiring topology as follows : Topology Pin No Description CABLE SIZE No earth fault measuring 54 DO NOT CONNECT 55 Connect to s2 of the CTs connected to L1,L2,L3,N 2.5mm² AWG 13 Restricted earth fault measuring 54 Connect to s2 of the CTs connected to L1,L2,L3,N 2.5mm² AWG 13 55 Connect to s1 of the CT on the neutral conductor 2.5mm² AWG 13 Un-restricted earth fault measuring (Earth fault CT is fitted in the neutral to earth link) 54 Connect to s1 of the CT on the neutral to earth conductor. 2.5mm² AWG 13 55 Connect to s2 of the CT on the neutral to earth link. Also connect to the s2 of CTs connected to L1, L2, L3. 2.5mm² AWG 13 4.1.7 MAINS CURRENT TRANSFORMERS PIN No DESCRIPTION CABLE SIZE NOTES 56 CT Secondary for Mains L1 2.5mm² AWG 13 Connect to s1 secondary of L1 monitoring CT 57 CT Secondary for Mains L2 2.5mm² AWG 13 Connect to s2 secondary of L2 monitoring CT NOTE:- Take care to ensure correct polarity of the CT primary as shown overleaf. If in doubt, check with the CT supplier. NOTE: - Terminals 56 to 59 are not fitted to the 8610 series controller.
  • 42. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 42 CT CONNECTIONS p1, k or K is the primary of the CT that ‘points’ towards the GENERATOR p2, l or L is the primary of the CT that ‘points’ towards the LOAD s1 is the secondary of the CT that connects to the DSE Module’s input for the CT measuring (I1,I2,I3) s2 is the secondary of the CT that should be commoned with the s2 connections of all the other CTs and connected to the CT common terminal of the DSE8600 series modules. CT labelled as p1, k or K To Load CT labelled as To Supply p2, l or L
  • 43. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 4.1.8 CONFIGURABLE DIGITAL INPUTS 43 PIN No DESCRIPTION CABLE SIZE NOTES 60 Configurable digital input A 0.5mm² AWG 20 Switch to negative 61 Configurable digital input B 0.5mm² AWG 20 Switch to negative 62 Configurable digital input C 0.5mm² AWG 20 Switch to negative 63 Configurable digital input D 0.5mm² AWG 20 Switch to negative 64 Configurable digital input E 0.5mm² AWG 20 Switch to negative 65 Configurable digital input F 0.5mm² AWG 20 Switch to negative 66 Configurable digital input G 0.5mm² AWG 20 Switch to negative 67 Configurable digital input H 0.5mm² AWG 20 Switch to negative 68 Configurable digital input I 0.5mm² AWG 20 Switch to negative 69 Configurable digital input J 0.5mm² AWG 20 Switch to negative 70 Configurable digital input K 0.5mm² AWG 20 Switch to negative NOTE:- See the software manual for full range of configurable outputs available. 4.1.9 PC CONFIGURATION INTERFACE CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION CABLE SIZE NOTES Socket for connection to PC with 86xx series PC software. 0.5mm² AWG 20 This is a standard USB type A to type B connector. NOTE:- The USB connection cable between the PC and the 8600 series module must not be extended beyond 5m (yards). For distances over 5m, it is possible to use a third party USB extender. Typically, they extend USB up to 50m (yards). The supply and support of this type of equipment is outside the scope of Deep Sea Electronics PLC. CAUTION!: Care must be taken not to overload the PCs USB system by connecting more than the recommended number of USB devices to the PC. For further information, consult your PC supplier. CAUTION!: This socket must not be used for any other purpose.
  • 44. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 44 4.1.10 RS485 CONNECTOR PIN No NOTES A Two core screened twisted pair cable. 120W impedance suitable for RS485 use. Recommended cable type - Belden 9841 Max distance 1200m (1.2km) when using Belden 9841 or direct equivalent. B SCR Location of RS485 connector 4.1.11 RS232 CONNECTOR PIN No NOTES 1 Received Line Signal Detector (Data Carrier Detect) 2 Received Data 3 Transmit Data 4 Data Terminal Ready 5 Signal Ground 6 Data Set Ready 7 Request To Send 8 Clear To Send 9 Ring Indicator Location of RS232 connector View looking into the male connector on the 8000 series module
  • 45. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 4.2 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS As every system has different requirements, these diagrams show only a TYPICAL system and do not intend to show a complete system. Genset manufacturers and panel builders may use these diagrams as a starting point; however, you are referred to the completed system diagram provided by your system manufacturer for complete wiring detail. Further wiring suggestions are available in the following DSE publications, available at www.deepseaplc.com to website members. DSE PART DESCRIPTION 056-022 Breaker Control (Training guide) 057-004 Electronic Engines and DSE Wiring 45
  • 46. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 4.2.1 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION NOTE:- Earthing the neutral conductor ‘before’ the neutral CT allows the module to read earth faults ‘after’ the CT only (Restricted to load / downstream of the CT) Earthing the neutral conductor ‘after’ the neutral CT allows the module to read earth faults ‘before’ the CT only (Restricted to generator / upstream of the CT) NOTE:- The MAINS CT is only required on for ‘true’ peak lop systems where the mains is held at a constant level and the generator provides variable power to the load. 46
  • 47. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 47 4.3 ALTERNATIVE TOPOLOGIES The 8000 controller is factory configured to connect to a 3 phase, 4 wire Star connected alternator. This section details connections for alternative AC topologies. Ensure to configure the 8000 series controller to suit the required topology. NOTE:- Further details of module configuration are contained within the DSE8000 Series configuration software manual (DSE part number 057-078) 4.3.1 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
  • 48. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 4.3.2 SINGLE PHASE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT NOTE:- Earthing the neutral conductor ‘before’ the neutral CT allows the module to read earth faults ‘after’ the CT only (Restricted to load / downstream of the CT) Earthing the neutral conductor ‘after’ the neutral CT allows the module to read earth faults ‘before’ the CT only (Restricted to generator / upstream of the CT) 4.3.3 SINGLE PHASE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT 48
  • 49. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 4.3.4 2 PHASE (L1 & L2) 3 WIRE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT NOTE:- Earthing the neutral conductor ‘before’ the neutral CT allows the module to read earth faults ‘after’ the CT only (Restricted to load / downstream of the CT) Earthing the neutral conductor ‘after’ the neutral CT allows the module to read earth faults ‘before’ the CT only (Restricted to generator / upstream of the CT) 4.3.5 2 PHASE (L1 & L2) 3 WIRE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT 49
  • 50. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 4.3.6 2 PHASE (L1 & L3) 3 WIRE WITH RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT NOTE:- Earthing the neutral conductor ‘before’ the neutral CT allows the module to read earth faults ‘after’ the CT only (Restricted to load / downstream of the CT) Earthing the neutral conductor ‘after’ the neutral CT allows the module to read earth faults ‘before’ the CT only (Restricted to generator / upstream of the CT) 4.3.7 2 PHASE (L1 & L3) 3 WIRE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT MEASURING 50
  • 51. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 4.3.8 3 PHASE 4 WIRE WITH UNRESTRICTED EARTH FAULT MEASURING NOTE:- Unrestricted Earth Fault Protection detects earth faults in the load and in the generator. Be sure to measure the natural earth fault of the site before deciding upon an earth fault alarm trip level. 51 4.3.9 EARTH SYSTEMS 4.3.9.1 Negative Earth The typical wiring diagrams located within this document show connections for a negative earth system (the battery negative connects to Earth) 4.3.9.2 Positive Earth When using a DSE module with a Positive Earth System (the battery positive connects to Earth), the following points must be followed: · Follow the typical wiring diagram as normal for all sections EXCEPT the earth points · All points shown as Earth on the typical wiring diagram should connect to BATTERY NEGATIVE (not earth). 4.3.9.3 Floating earth Where neither the battery positive nor battery negative terminals are connected to earth the following points must to be followed · Follow the typical wiring diagram as normal for all sections EXCEPT the earth points · All points shown as Earth on the typical wiring diagram should connect to BATTERY NEGATIVE (not earth).
  • 52. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 4.4 TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT OF DSENET® Twenty (20) devices can be connected to the DSENet®, made up of the following devices : Device Max number supported DSE2130 Input Expansion 4 DSE2157 Output Expansion 10 DSE2548 LED Expansion 10 For part numbers of the expansion modules and their documentation, see section entitled DSENet Expansion Modules elsewhere in this manual. 52
  • 53. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 53 4.4.1 EARTH SYSTEMS 4.4.1.1 Negative Earth The typical wiring diagrams located within this document show connections for a negative earth system (the battery negative connects to Earth) 4.4.1.2 Positive Earth When using a DSE module with a Positive Earth System (the battery positive connects to Earth), the following points must be followed: · Follow the typical wiring diagram as normal for all sections EXCEPT the earth points · All points shown as Earth on the typical wiring diagram should connect to BATTERY NEGATIVE (not earth). 4.4.1.3 Floating Earth Where neither the battery positive nor battery negative terminals are connected to earth, the following points must to be followed · Follow the typical wiring diagram as normal for all sections EXCEPT the earth points · All points shown as Earth on the typical wiring diagram should connect to BATTERY NEGATIVE (not earth).
  • 54. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 5 DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS The following section details the function and meaning of the various controls on the module. 5.1 DSE8620 AUTOMATIC MAINS FAILURE (AMF) CONTROL MODULE 54 Menu navigation buttons Four configurable LEDs Select Stop mode Select Manual mode Select Auto mode Transfer to Generator (manual mode only) Start engine(s) (when in manual or Testmode) Mute alarm / Lamp test Transfer to mains (manual mode only) Main status and instrumentation display Select Test mode
  • 55. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 55 Mains Available LED. On when the mains is within limits and able to take load. Close Mains LED. On When The Mains Is On Load. Close Bus LED. On When The Bus Is On Load. Generator Available LED. On when the generator is within limits and able to take load.
  • 56. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 5.2 VIEWING THE INSTRUMENT PAGES It is possible to scroll to display the different pages of information by repeatedly operating the next / If you want to view one of the instrument pages towards the end of the list, it may be quicker to scroll left through the pages rather than right! 56 previous page buttons . Example Status Engine Generator And so on until the last page is reached. A Further press of the scroll right button returns the display to the Status page. The complete order and contents of each information page are given in the following sections Once selected the page will remain on the LCD display until the user selects a different page, or after an extended period of inactivity (LCD Page Timer), the module will revert to the status display. If no buttons are pressed upon entering an instrumentation page, the instruments will be displayed automatically subject to the setting of the LCD Scroll Timer. The LCD Page and LCD Scroll timers are configurable using the DSE Configuration Suite Software or by using the Front Panel Editor. The screenshot shows the factory settings for the timers, taken from the DSE Configuration Suite Software. Alternatively, to scroll manually through all instruments on the currently selected page, press the scroll buttons. The ‘autoscroll’ is disabled. If you want to view one of the instruments towards the end of the list, it may be quicker to scroll up through the instruments rather than down! To re-enable ‘autoscroll’ press the scroll buttons to scroll to the ‘title’ of the instrumentation page (ie Engine). A short time later (the duration of the LCD Scroll Timer), the instrumentation display will begin to autoscroll. When scrolling manually, the display will automatically return to the Status page if no buttons are pressed for the duration of the configurable LCD Page Timer. If an alarm becomes active while viewing the status page, the display shows the Alarms page to draw the operator’s attention to the alarm condition.
  • 57. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual ‘Stop Mode’ etc is displayed on the Home Page 57 5.2.1 STATUS This is the ‘home’ page, the page that is displayed when no other page has been selected, and the page that is automatically displayed after a period of inactivity (LCD Page Timer) of the module control buttons. This page will change with the action of the controller , when on gen generator parameters will be seen and when changing to mains the mains parameters will be shown. SSSSttttaaaattttuuuussss 22222222::::33331111 Factory setting of Status screen showing engine stopped... GGGGeeeennnneeeerrrraaaattttoooorrrr aaaatttt RRRReeeesssstttt SSSSttttoooopppp MMMMooooddddeeee SSSSaaaaffffeeeettttyyyy oooonnnn DDDDeeeellllaaaayyyy 00000000::::00004444 ...and engine running L-NNNN 222211115555VVVV 44443333AAAA L-LLLL 333377773333VVVV 44447777....5555HHHHzzzz 0000kkkkWWWW 0000....0000ppppffff The contents of this display may vary depending upon configuration by the generator manufacturer / supplier. The display above is achieved with the factory settings, shown below in the DSE Configuration suite software: With a summary of the instrumentation shown when the engine is running. Other pages can be configured to be shown, automatically scrolling when the set is running. NOTE:- The following sections detail instrumentation pages, accessible using the scroll left and right buttons, regardless of what pages are configured to be displayed on the ‘status’ screen.
  • 58. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 58 5.2.2 ENGINE Contains instrumentation gathered about the engine itself, some of which may be obtained using the CAN or other electronic engine link. · Engine Speed · Oil Pressure · Coolant Temperature · Engine Battery Volts · Engine Run Time · Engine Fuel Level · Oil Temperature* · Coolant Pressure* · Inlet Temperature* · Exhaust Temperature* · Fuel Temperature* · Turbo Pressure* · Fuel Pressure* · Fuel Consumption* · Fuel Used* · Fuel Level* · Auxiliary Sensors (If fitted and configured) · Engine Maintenance Due (If configured) · Engine ECU Link* *When connected to suitably configured and compatible engine ECU. For details of supported engines see ‘Electronic Engines and DSE wiring’ (DSE Part number 057-004). · Tier 4 engine information will also be available if used with a Tier 4 suitable engine / ECU. Depending upon configuration and instrument function, some of the instrumentation items may include a tick icon beside them. This denotes a further function is available, detailed in the ‘operation’ section of this document. Example: The tick icon denotes that manual fuel pump control is enabled in this system. Press and hold to start the fuel transfer pump, release to stop the pump. This is detailed further in the section entitled ‘operation’ elsewhere in this document.
  • 59. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 5.2.3 GENERATOR Contains electrical values of the generator (alternator), measured or derived from the module’s voltage and current inputs. 59 · Generator Voltage (ph-N) · Generator Voltage (ph-ph) · Generator Frequency · Generator Current · Generator Earth Current · Generator Load % · Generator Load (kW) · Generator Load (kVA) · Generator Power Factor · Generator Power Factor Average · Generator Load (kVAr) · Generator Load (kWh, kVAh, kVArh) · Generator Phase Sequence · Generator config (Nominals) · Generator Active Config · Synchroscope display 5.2.4 MAINS · Mains Voltage (ph-N) · Mains Voltage (ph-ph) · Mains Frequency · Mains Current · Mains Load (kW) · Mains Load Total (kW) · Mains Load (kVA) · Mains Load Total (kVA) · Mains Power Factor · Mains Power Factor Average · Mains Load (kVAr) · Mains Load (kWh, kVAh, kVArh) · Mains Phase Sequence · Mains config (Nominals) · Mains Active Config
  • 60. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 5.2.1 RS232 SERIAL PORT This section is included to give information about the RS232 serial port and external modem (if connected). The items displayed on this page will change depending upon configuration of the module. You are referred to your system supplier for further details. NOTE:- Factory Default settings are for the RS232 port to be enabled with no modem connected, operating at 19200 baud, modbus slave address 10. Example 1 – Module connected to an RS232 telephone modem. When the DSE8610 series module is power up, it will send ‘initialisation strings’ to the connected modem. It is important therefore that the modem is already powered, or is powered up at the same time as the DSE86xx series module. At regular intervals after power up, the modem is reset, and reinitialised, to ensure the modem does not ‘hang up’. If the DSE8610 series module does not correctly communicate with the modem, “Modem initialising’ appears on the Serial Port instrument screen as shown overleaf. If the module is set for “incoming calls” or for “incoming and outgoing calls”, then if the modem is dialled, it will answer after two rings (using the factory setting ‘initialisation strings)’. Once the call is established, all data is passed from the dialling PC and the DSE8610 series module. If the module is set for “outgoing calls” or for “incoming and outgoing calls”, then the module will dial out whenever an alarm is generated. Note that not all alarms will generate a dial out; this is dependant upon module configuration of the event log. Any item configured to appear in the event log will cause a dial out. Press down to view the modem status.... Indicates that a modem is configured. Shows ‘RS232’ if no modem is configured. 60
  • 61. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 61 Example 1 continued – Modem diagnostics Modem diagnostic screens are included; press when viewing the RS232 Serial Port instrument to cycle the available screens. If you are experiencing modem communication problems, this information will aid troubleshooting. SSSSeeeerrrriiiiaaaallll PPPPoooorrrrtttt RRRRTTTTSSSS CCCCTTTTSSSS DDDDSSSSRRRR DDDDTTTTRRRR DDDDCCCCDDDD Line Description RTS Request To Send Flow control CTS Clear To Send Flow control DSR Data Set Ready Ready to communicate DTR Data Terminal Ready Ready to communicate DCD Data Carrier Detect Modem is connected MMMMooooddddeeeemmmm CCCCoooommmmmmmmaaaannnnddddssss RRRRxxxx:::: OOOOKKKK TTTTxxxx:::: AAAATTTT++++IIIIPPPPRRRR====9999666600000000 RRRRxxxx:::: OOOOKKKK Modem Setup Sequence 1) If the Modem and DSE8600 series communicate successfully: 2) Shows the state of the modem communication lines. These can help diagnose connection problems. Example: RTS A dark background shows the line is active. RTS a grey background shows that the line is toggling high and low. RTS No background indicates that the line is inactive Shows the last command sent to the modem and the result of the command.
  • 62. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual In case of communication failure between the modem and DSE8600 series module, the modem is automatically reset and initialisation is attempted once more: Currently connected GSM operator and signal strength. 62 3) In the case of a module that is unable to communicate with the modem, the display will continuously cycle between ‘Modem Reset’ and ‘Modem Initialising’ as the module resets the modem and attempts to communicate with it again, this will continue until correct communication is established with the modem. In this instance, you should check connections and verify the modem operation. Example 2 – Module connected to a modem. Example 3 – Modem status of a GSM modem Many GSM modems are fitted with a status LED to show operator cell status and ringing indicator. These can be a useful troubleshooting tool. In the case of GSM connection problems, try calling the DATA number of the SIMCARD with an ordinary telephone. There should be two rings, followed by the modem answering the call and then ‘squealing’. If this does not happen, you should check all modem connections and double check with the SIM provider that it is a DATA SIM and can operate as a data modem. DATA is NOT the same as FAX or GPRS and is often called Circuit Switched Data (CSD) by the SIM provider. NOTE: In the case of GSM modems, it is important that a DATA ENABLED SIM is used. This is often a different number than the ‘voice number’ and is often called Circuit Switched Data (CSD) by the SIM provider. If the GSM modem is not purchased from DSE, ensure that it has been correctly set to operate at 9600 baud. You may need to install a terminal program on your PC and consult your modem supplier to do this. GSM modems purchased from DSE are already configured to work with the DSE86xx series module.
  • 63. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 5.2.1 RS485 SERIAL PORT This section is included to give information about the currently selected serial port and external modem (if connected). The items displayed on this page will change depending upon configuration of the module. You are referred to your system supplier for further details. NOTE:- Factory Default settings are for the RS485 port to operating at 19200 baud, 63 modbus slave address 10. Module RS485 port configured for connection to a modbus master. DSE86xx series modules operate as a modbus RTU slave device. In a modbus system, there can be only one Master, typically a PLC, HMI system or PC SCADA system. This master requests for information from the modbus slave (DSE86xx series module) and may (in control systems) also send request to change operating modes etc. Unless the Master makes a request, the slave is ‘quiet’ on the data link. The factory settings are for the module to communicate at 19200 baud, modbus slave address 10. To use the RS485 port, ensure that ‘port usage’ is correctly set using the DSE Configuration Suite Software. Required settings are shown below. ‘Master inactivity timeout’ should be set to at least twice the value of the system scan time. For example if a modbus master PLC requests data from the DSE86xx modbus slave once per second, the timeout should be set to at least 2 seconds. The DSE Modbus Gencomm document containing register mappings inside the DSE module is available upon request from support@deepseaplc.com. Email your request along with the serial number of your DSE module to ensure the correct information is sent to you.
  • 64. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 64 Typical requests (using Pseudo code) BatteryVoltage=ReadRegister(10,0405,1) : reads register (hex) 0405 as a single register (battery volts) from slave address 10. WriteRegister(10,1008,2,35701, 65535-35701) : Puts the module into AUTO mode by writing to (hex) register 1008, the values 35701 (auto mode) and register 1009 the value 65535-35701 (the bitwise opposite of auto mode) Shutdown=(ReadRegister(10,0306,1) >> 12) & 1) : reads (hex) 0306 and looks at bit 13 (shutdown alarm present) Warning=(ReadRegister(10,0306,1) >> 11) & 1) : reads (hex) 0306 and looks at bit 12 (Warning alarm present) ElectricalTrip=(ReadRegister(10,0306,1) >> 10) & 1) : reads (hex) 0306 and looks at bit 11 (Electrical Trip alarm present) ControlMode=ReadRegister(10,0304,2); reads (hex) register 0304 (control mode). 5.2.2 ABOUT Contains important information about the module and the firmware versions. This information may be asked for when contacting DSE Technical Support Department for advice. · Module Type (i.e. 8620) · Application Version – The version of the module’s main firmware file – Updatable using the Firmware Update Wizard in the DSE Configuration Suite Software. · USB ID – unique identifier for PC USB connection · Analogue Measurements software version · Firmware Update Boot loader software version. 5.2.2.1 Ethernet Pages · Update Network settings using DSE Configuration Suite Software+ 1 Power cycle off/on before the editor pages are updated.. NNNNeeeettttwwwwoooorrrrkkkk IIIIPPPP aaaaddddddddrrrreeeessssssss 111199992222....xxxxxxxxxxxx....xxxxxxxx....xxxxxxxx DDDDHHHHCCCCPPPP DDDDiiiissssaaaabbbblllleeeedddd NNNNeeeettttwwwwoooorrrrkkkk SSSSuuuubbbbnnnneeeetttt mmmmaaaasssskkkk 222255555555....222255555555....222255555555....0000 NNNNeeeettttwwwwoooorrrrkkkk GGGGaaaatttteeeewwwwaaaayyyy aaaaddddddddrrrreeeessssssss 111199992222....xxxxxxxxxxxx....xxxxxxxx....xxxxxxxxxxxx NNNNeeeettttwwwwoooorrrrkkkk DDDDNNNNSSSS aaaaddddddddrrrreeeessssssss 111199992222....xxxxxxxxxxxx....xxxxxxxx....xxxxxxxx
  • 65. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 65 NNNNeeeettttwwwwoooorrrrkkkk MMMMAAAACCCC aaaaddddddddrrrreeeessssssss EEEE8888....AAAA4444....CCCC1111....0000....AAAA....CCCC2222 DDDDHHHHCCCCPPPP HHHHOOOOSSSSTTTT DDDDOOOOMMMMAAAAIIIINNNN VVVVeeeennnnddddoooorrrr MMMMOOOODDDDBBBBUUUUSSSS oooovvvveeeerrrr IIIIPPPP TTTTCCCCPPPP PPPPoooorrrrtttt 555500002222 PPPPrrrreeeeffff IIIIPPPP 0000....0000....0000....0000 Pages available in the “ABOUT” screen to confirm Network settings. Data Logging Pages The DSE data logging pages show information depending on the configuration in the module. Data Logging Log to internal memory Logging active No USB drive present Inserting a USB drive to the host USB will display the following change to the page. Data Logging Log to USB drive Logging active Do not remove USB drive NOTE:- Removal of the USB drive should only be carried out using the following method. Press and hold the tick button until “Ok to remove USB drive” is displayed. Data Logging Log to USB drive Logging active Ok to remove USB drive It is now safe to remove the USB drive. This ensures the logging data file will save to memory complete and will not become corrupt. Press down to view the next page. Data Logging Unique setting for each module Location of stored data. Internal module memory or external USB memory. If data logging is active or inactive Remaining time available for logging information. xxxx hours xx minutes
  • 66. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 66 Time remaining xxxx h xx m Press down to view the next page. Data Logging Memory remaining xxxx . 5.2.1 CAN ERROR MESSAGES When connected to a suitable CAN engine the 8620 series controller displays alarm status messages from the ECU. Alarm ECU Warning Warning Press to access the list of current active Engine DTCs (Diagnostic Trouble Codes). Engine DTCs The code interpreted by the module shows on the display as a text message. Additionally, the manufacturer’s Water Level code is shown. Low Xxx,xxx,xxx NOTE: - For details on these code meanings, refer to the ECU instructions provided by the engine manufacturer, or contact the engine manufacturer for further assistance. NOTE: - For further details on connection to electronic engines please refer to Electronic engines and DSE wiring. Part No. 057-004 Memory space remaining, this depends what size memory drive is fitted (Max 16Gb) or allocated internal (2Mb) memory left available. Type of alarm that is triggered in the DSE module (i.e. Warning or Shutdown)
  • 67. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 67 5.3 VIEWING THE EVENT LOG The DSE8600 series modules maintain a log of past alarms and/or selected status changes. The log size has been increased in the module over past module updates and is always subject to change. At the time of writing, the 86xx series log is capable of storing the last 250 log entries. Under default factory settings, the event log only includes shutdown and electrical trip alarms logged (The event log does not contain Warning alarms); however, this is configurable by the system designer using the DSE Configuration Suite software. Example showing the possible configuration of the DSE8600 series event log (DSE Configuration Suite Software) This also shows the factory settings of the module (Only shutdown alarms and the mains status are logged). Once the log is full, any subsequent shutdown alarms will overwrite the oldest entry in the log. Hence, the log will always contain the most recent shutdown alarms. The module logs the alarm, along with the date and time of the event (or engine running hours if configured to do so). If the module is configured and connected to send SMS text To view the event log, repeatedly press the next page button until the LCD screen displays the Event log : Event log 1 Oil Pressure Low Shutdown 12 Sep 2007, 08:25:46 This is event 1. Press down to view the next most recent shutdown alarm: Continuing to press down cycles through the past alarms after which the display shows the most recent alarm and the cycle begins again. To exit the event log and return to viewing the instruments, press the next page button to select the next instrumentation page.
  • 68. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 5.4 USER CONFIGURABLE INDICATORS These LEDs can be configured by the user to indicate any one of 100+ different functions based around the following:- · Indications - Monitoring of a digital input and indicating associated functioning user’s equipment - Such as Battery Charger On or Louvres Open, etc. · WARNINGS and SHUTDOWNS - Specific indication of a particular warning or shutdown condition, backed up by LCD indication - Such as Low Oil Pressure Shutdown, Low Coolant level, etc. · Status Indications - Indication of specific functions or sequences derived from the modules operating state - Such as Safety On, Pre-heating, Panel Locked, Generator Available, etc. 68 User configurable LEDs
  • 69. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 69 6 OPERATION 6.1 CONTROL Control of the DSE8620 module is via push buttons mounted on the front of the module with STOP/RESET, MANUAL, TEST, AUTO, ALARM MUTE and START functions. For normal operation, these are the only controls which need to be operated. The smaller push buttons are used to access further information such as mains voltage or to change the state of the load switching devices when in manual mode. Details of their operation are provided later in this document. The following descriptions detail the sequences followed by a module containing the standard ‘factory configuration’. Always refer to your configuration source for the exact sequences and timers observed by any particular module in the field. CAUTION: - The module may instruct an engine start event due to external influences. Therefore, it is possible for the engine to start at any time without warning. Prior to performing any maintenance on the system, it is recommended that steps are taken to remove the battery and isolate supplies. NOTE: -PLC Functionality. This control module has PLC functionality built in. This can have change the standard operation when used.( Default configuration the no PLC is set. See software manual for more information)
  • 70. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 70 6.2 CONTROL PUSH-BUTTONS STOP/RESET This push-button places the module into its Stop/reset mode. This will clear any alarm conditions for which the triggering criteria have been removed. If the engine is running and this push-button is operated, the module will automatically instruct the generator contactor/breaker to unload the generator. The fuel supply will be removed and engine will be brought to a standstill. Should a remote start signal be present while operating in the mode, a remote start will not occur. MANUAL This push-button is used to allow manual control of the generator functions. Entering this mode from another mode will initially not cause any change of operating state, but allows further push-buttons to be used to control the generator operation. For example, once in Manual mode it is possible to start the engine by using the ‘START’ push-button. If the engine is running, off-load in the Manual mode and a remote start signal becomes present, the module will automatically instruct the generator contactor/breaker device to place the generator on load. Should the remote start signal then be removed the generator will remain on load until either the ‘STOP/RESET’ or ‘AUTO’ push-buttons are operated. START This push-button is used to start the engine. The module must first be placed in the ‘MANUAL’ mode of operation. The ‘START’ button should then be operated. The engine will then automatically attempt to start. Should it fail on the first attempt it will re-try until either the engine fires or the pre-set number of attempts have been made. To stop the engine the ‘STOP/RESET’ button should be operated. It is also possible to configure the module such that the start push-button must be held to maintain engine cranking. NOTE:- Different modes of operation are possible - Please refer to your configuration source for details. AUTO This push-button places the module into its ‘Automatic’ mode. This mode allows the module to control the function of the generator automatically. The module will monitor the remote start input and once a start condition is signalled the set will be automatically started and placed on load. If the starting signal is removed, the module will automatically transfer the load from the generator and shut the set down observing the stop delay timer and cooling timer as necessary. The module will then await the next start event. For further details, please see the more detailed description of ‘Auto Operation’ earlier in this manual. Mute / Lamp Test This button silences the audible alarm if it is sounding and illuminates all of the LEDs as a lamp test feature.
  • 71. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual Test This button places the module into its ‘Test’ mode. This allows an on load test of the generator. Once in Test mode the module will respond to the start button, start the engine, and run on load. For further details, please see the more detailed description of ‘Test operation’ elsewhere in this document. Transfer to mains Operative in Manual Mode only 71 ‘Normal’ breaker button control · Allows the operator to transfer the load to the mains · If the Generator is on load and mains is available the generator will synchronise and parallel with the mains. · If the Generator & mains are in parallel, the generator power will ramp off and open the generator breaker. ‘Alternative’ breaker button control ( Synchronises when necessary ) · If generator is on load, transfers the load to the mains. · If mains is on load, opens the mains breaker · If generator and mains are off load, closes the mains breaker. Transfer to generator Operative in Manual Mode only ‘Normal’ breaker button control · Allows the operator to transfer the load to the generator · If the mains is on load and the generator is available the generator will synchronise and parallel with the mains. · If the mains & generator are in parallel the generator power will ramp up and open the mains breaker. ‘Alternative’ breaker button control ( Synchronises when necessary ) · If mains is on load, transfers the load to the generator. · If generator is on load, opens the generator breaker · If generator and mains are off load, closes the generator breaker Menu navigation Used for navigating the instrumentation, event log and configuration screens. For further details, please see the more detailed description of these items elsewhere in this manual The following description details the sequences followed by a module containing the standard ‘factory configuration’. Remember that if you have purchased a completed generator set or control panel from your supplier, the module’sconfiguration will probably have been changed by them to suit their particular requirements. Always refer to your configuration source for the exact sequences and timers observed by any particular module in the field.
  • 72. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 6.3 DUMMY LOAD / LOAD SHEDDING CONTROL This feature may be enabled by the system designer to ensure the loading on the generator is kept to a nominal amount. If the load is low, ‘dummy loads’ (typically static load banks) can be introduced to ensure the engine is not too lightly loaded. Conversely as the load increases towards the maximum rating of the set, non-essential loads can be shed to prevent overload of the generator. 72 6.2.1 DUMMY LOAD CONTROL The dummy load control feature (if enabled) allows for a maximum of five dummy load steps. When the set is first started, all configured Dummy Load Control outputs are de-energised. Once the generator is placed onto load, the generator loading is monitored by the Dummy Load Control scheme. If the generator loading falls below the Dummy Load Control Trip setting (kW), the Dummy Load Control Trip Delay is displayed on the module display. If the generator loading remains at this low level for the duration of the timer, the first Dummy Load Control output is energised. This is used to energise external circuits to switch in (for instance) a static load bank. The generator loading has now been increased by the first dummy load. Again the generator loading is monitored. This continues until all configured Dummy Load Control outputs are energised. Should the generator loading rise above the Dummy Load Return level, the Dummy Load Return Delay begins. If the loading remains at these levels after the completion of the timer, the ‘highest’ active Dummy Load Control output is de-energised. This continues until all Dummy Load Control outputs have been de-energised. Example screen shot of Dummy Load Control setup in the DSE Configuration Suite 6.2.2 LOAD SHEDDING CONTROL The Load Shedding Control feature (if enabled) allows for a maximum of five load shedding steps. When the generator is about to take load, the configured number of Load Shedding Control Outputs at Startup will energise. This configurable setting allows (for instance) certain loads to be removed from the generator prior to the set’s load switch being closed. This can be used to ensure the initial loading of the set is kept to a minimum, below the Load Acceptance specification of the generating set. The generator is then placed on load. The Load Shedding Control scheme begins. When the load reaches the Load Shedding Trip level the Trip Delay timer will start. If the generator loading is still high when the timer expires, the first Load shedding Control output will energise. When the load has been above the trip level for the duration of the timer the ‘next’ Load shedding Control output will energise and so on until all Load Shedding Control outputs are energised. If at any time the load falls back below the Load Shedding Return level, the Return Time will start. If the load remains below the return level when the timer has expired the ‘highest’ Load Shedding Control output that has been energised will be de-energised. This process will continue until all outputs have been de-energised. When the set enters a stopping sequence for any reason the Load Shedding control’ outputs will de-energise at the same time as the generator load switch is signalled to open. Details can be found in the 057-119 8600 Configuration suite software Manual.
  • 73. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 6.4 STOP MODE STOP mode is activated by pressing the button. In STOP mode, the module will remove the generator from load (if necessary) before stopping the engine if it is already running. If the engine does not stop when requested, the FAIL TO STOP alarm is activated (subject to the setting of the Fail to Stop timer). To detect the engine at rest the following must occur : · Engine speed is zero as detected by the Magnetic Pickup or CANbus ECU (depending upon 73 module variant). · Generator frequency must be zero. · Oil pressure switch must be closed to indicate low oil pressure (MPU version only) When the engine has stopped, it is possible to send configuration files to the module from DSE Configuration Suite PC software and to enter the Front Panel Editor to change parameters. Any latched alarms that have been cleared will be reset when STOP mode is entered. The engine will not be started when in STOP mode. If remote start signals are given, the input is ignored until AUTO mode is entered. When configured to do so, When left in STOP mode for five minutes with no presses of the fascia buttons, the module enters low power mode. To ‘wake’ the module, press the button or any other fascia control button. Sleep mode configuration in the DSE Configuration Suite Software
  • 74. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 74 6.4.1 ECU OVERRIDE NOTE:- ECU Override function is only applicable when the controller is configured for a CAN engine. NOTE:- Depending upon system design, the ECU may be powered or unpowered when the module is in STOP mode. ECU override is only applicable if the ECU is unpowered when in STOP mode. When the ECU powered down (as is normal when in STOP mode), it is not possible to read the diagnostic trouble codes or instrumentation. Additionally, it is not possible to use the engine manufacturers’ configuration tools. As the ECU is usually unpowered when the engine is not running, it must be turned on manually as follows : · Select STOP mode on the DSE controller. · Press and hold the START button to power the ECU. As the controller is in STOP mode, the engine will not be started. . · The ECU will remain powered 2 minutes after the START button is released. This is also useful if the engine manufacturer’s tools need to be connected to the engine, for instance to configure the engine as the ECU needs to be powered up to perform this operation.
  • 75. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 75 6.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION 6.5.1 MAINS FAILURE This mode of operation is used to ensure continuity of supply to critical loads during a mains failure condition. This is the normal mode of operation when installed on a standby generator. NOTE: If a digital input configured to panel lock is active, changing module modes will not be possible. Viewing the instruments and event logs is NOT affected by panel lock. This mode is activated by pressing the pushbutton. An LED indicator beside the button will illuminate to confirm this operation. Auto mode will allow the generator to operate fully automatically, starting and stopping as required with no user intervention. Should the mains (utility) supply fall outside the configurable limits for longer than the period of the mains transient delay timer, the mains (utility) available GREEN indicator LED extinguishes. To allow for short term mains supply transient conditions, the Start Delay timer is initiated. After this delay, if the pre-heat output option is selected then the pre-heat timer is initiated and the corresponding auxiliary output (if configured) will energise. NOTE: - If the mains supply returns within limits during the Start Delay timer, the unit will return to a stand-by state. After the above delays have expired the Fuel Solenoid (or enable ECU output if configured) is energised, then one second later, the Starter Motor is engaged. NOTE:- If the unit has been configured for CAN Bus, compatible ECU’s will receive the start command via CAN Bus. Refer to the Manual CAN and DSE Wiring. Part No. 057-004 for more information on utilising DSE modules with electronically controlled engines. The engine is cranked for a pre-set time. If the engine fails to fire during this cranking attempt then the starter motor is disengaged for the pre-set rest period. Should this sequence continue beyond the set number of attempts, the start sequence will be terminated and Fail to Start fault will be displayed. Alarm Shutdown Fail to start When the engine fires, the starter motor is disengaged and locked out at a pre-set frequency measured from the alternator output. Alternatively, a Magnetic Pickup mounted on the flywheel housing can be used for speed detection (This is selected by PC using the 86xx series configuration software). Rising oil pressure can also be used to disconnect the starter motor; however it cannot be used for underspeed or overspeed detection. NOTE:- If the unit has been configured for CAN Bus, speed sensing is via CAN Bus.
  • 76. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual After the starter motor has disengaged, the Safety On timer is activated, allowing Oil Pressure, High Engine Temperature, Under-speed, Charge Fail and any delayed Auxiliary fault inputs to stabilise without triggering the fault. 6.5.1 ENGINE RUNNING Once the engine is running, the Warm Up timer, if selected, begins, allowing the engine to stabilise before accepting the load. After the Warm-up timer has expired then the module will transfer the load from the failed mains supply to the generator output. It will observe the following sequence. The Mains Contactor/Breaker will be instructed to open and after a short delay (transfer delay), the Generator Contactor/Breaker will be instructed to close. The generator will then supply the requirements of the load. NOTE:-A load transfer will not be initiated until the Oil Pressure has risen. This prevents excessive 76 wear on the engine. When the mains supply returns, the Stop delay timer is initiated. Once it has expired, the set is synchronised and paralleled with the mains supply. The system remains in this condition until expiry of the Parallel run timer. Once this has expired, the module will ramp the remaining load from the generator to mains supply. The Generator Contact/Breaker will open and the Cooling timer is then initiated, allowing the engine a cooling down period off load before shutting down. Once the Cooling timer expires, the Fuel Solenoid is de-energised, bringing the generator to a stop. During the parallel run, the module can be configured to either run at a fixed level output, or to maintain an output in relation to the load level on the mains. For full details of these mode please refer to the manual ‘The Guide to sync and load share Pt1’ Should the mains supply fall outside limits once again the set will return on load. NOTE: - When synchronising is enabled, the mains supply is checked before closing any load switching device. If the supply is live, synchronising will take place before any closure takes place. NOTE: - Synchronising can be disabled if the application does not require this function. Contact your genset supplier in the first instance for further details.
  • 77. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 6.5.2 REMOTE START IN ISLAND MODE This mode of operation is used to start the set in response to an external start requirement from another device. It may also be used to provide continuity of supply during expected black out events. NOTE:- If a digital input configured to panel lock is active, changing module modes will not be possible. Viewing the instruments and event log are NOT affected by panel lock. If panel lock is active the Panel lock indicator (if configured) illuminates. This mode is activated by pressing the pushbutton. An LED indicator beside the button will illuminate to confirm this operation. If the remote start in island mode input activates, the Remote Start Active indicator (if configured) illuminates. To allow for false remote start signals, the Start Delay timer is initiated. After this delay, if the pre-heat output option is selected then the pre-heat timer is initiated and the corresponding auxiliary output (if configured) will energise. NOTE:- If the Remote Start signal is removed during the Start Delay timer, the unit will return to a 77 stand-by state. After the above delays, the Fuel Solenoid (or enable ECU output if configured) is energised, and then one second later, the Starter Motor is engaged. NOTE: - If the unit has been configured for CAN Bus, compatible ECU’s will receive the start command via CAN Bus. Refer to the Manual CAN and DSE Wiring. Part No. 057-004 for more information on utilising DSE modules with electronically controlled engines. The engine is cranked for a pre-set time. If the engine fails to fire during this cranking attempt then the starter motor is disengaged for the pre-set rest period. Should this sequence continue beyond the set number of attempts, the start sequence will be terminated and Fail to Start fault will be displayed. Alarm Shutdown Fail to start When the engine fires, the starter motor is disengaged and locked out at a pre-set frequency measured from the alternator output. Alternatively, a Magnetic Pickup mounted on the flywheel housing can be used for speed detection (). Rising oil pressure can also be used to disconnect the starter motor; however, it cannot be used for underspeed or overspeed detection. NOTE: - If the unit is configured for CAN Bus, speed sensing is via CAN Bus.
  • 78. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual After the starter motor has disengaged, the Safety On timer is activated, allowing Oil Pressure, High Engine Temperature, Under-speed, Charge Fail and any delayed Auxiliary fault inputs to stabilise without triggering the fault. Once the engine is running, the Warm Up timer, if selected is initiated, allowing the engine to stabilise before accepting the load. NOTE: - A load transfer will not be initiated until the Oil Pressure has risen. This prevents excessive 78 wear on the engine. The Generator will first be instructed to synchronise with the mains supply before closing the Generator Contact/Breaker and transferring load from mains to generator until the generator is supplying the required amount of power (adjustable using DSE Configuration Suite software). When the supplies have been in parallel for the duration of the parallel run time, the load will ramp off the mains supply and onto the generator. The Mains Contactor/Breaker will be instructed to open. The generator will then supply the requirements of the load. When the remote start signal is removed, the Stop delay timer is initiated. Once it has expired, the set is synchronised and paralleled with the mains supply. The system remains in this condition until expiry of the Parallel run timer. Once this has expired, the module will ramp the remaining load from the generator to mains supply. Alternative Ramping Scheme- The controller holds the power until the end of the Parallel run timer before initiating any ramping off. The Generator Contact/Breaker will open and the Cooling timer is then initiated, allowing the engine a cooling down period off load before shutting down. Once the Cooling timer expires, the Fuel Solenoid is de-energised, bringing the generator to a stop. NOTE: - Synchronising can be disabled if the application does not require this function. Contact your generating set supplier in the first instance for further details. NOTE: - The internal ‘Scheduler’ can be configured to operate the system in the same manner as described for the Remote start input. Please refer to the 86xx Configuration Software manuals for full details on the feature.
  • 79. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 79 6.5.3 REMOTE START ON LOAD This mode of operation is used to start the set in response to rising load levels on the mains supply (if configured). NOTE: - If a digital input configured to panel lock is active, changing module modes will not be possible. Viewing the instruments and event log are NOT affected by panel lock. If panel lock is active the Panel lock indicator (if configured) illuminates. This mode is activated by pressing the pushbutton. An LED indicator beside the button will illuminate to confirm this operation. Should the load level on the mains supply exceed a pre-set level the module will initiate a start sequence. To allow for short duration load surges, the Start Delay timer is initiated. After this delay, if the pre-heat output option is selected then the pre-heat timer is initiated and the corresponding auxiliary output (if configured) will energise. NOTE: - If the load level returns below the pre-set level during the Start Delay timer, the unit will return to a stand-by state. After the above delays, the Fuel Solenoid (or enable ECU output if configured) is energised, and then one second later, the Starter Motor is engaged. NOTE: - If the unit has been configured for CAN Bus, compatible ECU’s will receive the start command via CAN Bus. Refer to the Manual CAN and DSE Wiring. Part No. 057-004 for more information on utilising DSE modules with electronically controlled engines. The engine is cranked for a pre-set time. If the engine fails to fire during this cranking attempt then the starter motor is disengaged for the pre-set rest period. Should this sequence continue beyond the set number of attempts, the start sequence will be terminated and Fail to Start fault will be displayed. Alarm Shutdown Fail to start When the engine fires, the starter motor is disengaged and locked out at a pre-set frequency measured from the alternator output. Alternatively, a Magnetic Pickup mounted on the flywheel housing can be used for speed detection (This is selected by PC using the DSE configuration Suite software). Rising oil pressure can also be used to disconnect the starter motor; however, it cannot be used for underspeed or overspeed detection. NOTE: - If the unit is configured for CAN Bus, speed sensing is via CAN Bus.
  • 80. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual After the starter motor has disengaged, the Safety On timer is activated, allowing Oil Pressure, High Engine Temperature, Under-speed, Charge Fail and any delayed Auxiliary fault inputs to stabilise without triggering the fault. Once the engine is running, the Warm Up timer, if selected is initiated, allowing the engine to stabilise before accepting the load. After the Warm-up timer has expired then the module will transfer the load from the mains supply to the generator output. It will observe the following sequence. The Generator will first be instructed to synchronise with the mains supply. Once these are matched, the Generator Contact/Breaker will be instructed to close. The load will then be ramped from the Mains to the appropriate level on the generator. The generator will then supply the requirements of the load. NOTE: - A load transfer will not be initiated until the Oil Pressure has risen. This prevents excessive 80 wear on the engine. Advanced Ramping Scheme - When configured the breaker closes and the Generator power is held until the end of the timer before ramping off When the remote start on load input is removed, the Stop delay timer is initiated. Once this timer has expired, the module will ramp the load from the generator to mains supply. The Generator Contact/Breaker will open and the Cooling timer is then initiated, allowing the engine a cooling down period off load before shutting down. Once the Cooling timer expires, the Fuel Solenoid is de-energised, bringing the generator to a stop. During the parallel run, the module can be configured to either run at a fixed level output, or to maintain an output in relation to the load level on the mains. NOTE: - When synchronising is enabled, the mains supply is checked before closing any load switching device. If the supply is live, synchronising will take place before any closure takes place. NOTE: - Synchronising can be disabled if the application does not require this function. Contact your genset supplier in the first instance for further details. NOTE: - The load level mode of operation relies on a Current Transformer (CT) fitted to the mains feed of the system. This is then used for measurement of the mains current used in the load level calculations.
  • 81. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 81 6.6 MANUAL OPERATION Manual mode is used to allow the operator to control the operation of the generator, and to provide fault finding and diagnostic testing of the various operations normally performed during Automatic mode operation. NOTE: - If a digital input configured to panel lock is active, changing module modes will not be possible. Viewing the instruments and event logs and event log is NOT affected by panel lock. If panel lock is active the Panel lock indicator (if configured) illuminates. MANUAL, mode is selected by pressing the pushbutton. An LED besides the button will illuminate to confirm this operation. When the button is operated, the module will initiate the start sequence. NOTE: - There is no Start Delay in this mode of operation. If the pre-heat output option has been selected, this timer will be initiated and the auxiliary output selected energised. After the above delay, the Fuel Solenoid (or ECU output if configured) is energised, and then one second later, the Starter Motor is engaged. NOTE:- If the unit is configured for CAN Bus, compatible ECU’s will receive the start command via CAN Bus. Refer to the Manual CAN and DSE Wiring. Part No. 057-004 for more information on utilising DSE modules with electronically controlled engines. The engine is cranked for a pre-set time. If the engine fails to fire during this cranking attempt then the starter motor is disengaged for the pre-set rest period. Should this sequence continue beyond the set number of attempts, the start sequence will be terminated and Fail to Start will be displayed. Alarm Shutdown Fail to start When the engine fires, the starter motor is disengaged and locked out at a pre-set frequency measured from the Alternator output. Alternatively, a Magnetic Pickup mounted on the flywheel housing can be used for speed detection (This is selected by PC using the 5xxx series configuration software). Rising oil pressure can also be used to disconnect the starter motor; however, it cannot be used for underspeed or overspeed detection. NOTE: - If the unit is configured for CAN Bus, speed sensing is via CAN Bus. After the starter motor has disengaged, the Safety On timer is activated, allowing Oil Pressure, High Engine Temperature, Under-speed, Charge Fail and any delayed Auxiliary fault inputs to stabilise without triggering the fault. Once the engine is running, the Warm Up timer (if selected) is initiated, allowing the engine to stabilise before it can be loaded. Once the warm up timer has expired, the generator is then available to go on load and the Generator Available LED will illuminate on the front panel.
  • 82. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 82 The generator will run off load unless: 1. The mains supply fails, 2. A Remote Start on load signal is applied, or an on-load run is configured in the scheduler. 3. The Close Generator button is pressed. If any of the above signals are received, the generator is synchronised and paralleled with the mains supply (if available). During the parallel run, the module can be configured to either run at a fixed level output, or to maintain an output in relation to the load level on the mains. For full details of these mode please refer to the manual ‘The Guide to sync and load share Pt1’ Parallel operation: · If the Close Generator button is pressed again while in parallel, then the module will transfer the load fully to the generators, removing the load from the mains supply. This will be achieved by ramping the load from the parallel operating level to the generator. The Mains Contactor/Breaker will then be opened. Pressing the Close Mains button will cause the module to re-synchronise the generator with the mains supply and then return to parallel operation. · If the Close Mains button is pressed while in parallel, the module will open the generator load switching device, transferring the load fully to the mains supply. If Auto mode is selected and the mains supply is healthy, and the remote start on load signal not active, and the scheduler is not calling for a run, then the Return Delay Timer will start. Once this has expired then the module will exit parallel operation and will ramp the load back to the mains supply. It will then open the Generator Contactor/Breaker. The generator will then run off load allowing the engine a cooling period. Selecting STOP (O) de-energises the FUEL SOLENOID, bringing the generator to a stop. WARNING: - Operation of the STOP button in any mode will stop the generator operation and return the load switching system to a safe state. This operation may lead to loss of supply to the load. It is recommended that the STOP button is only operated once the generator is OFF LOAD and the mains is supplying the load. NOTE: - Synchronising can be disabled if the application does not require this function. Contact your genset supplier in the first instance for further details. If synchronising is disabled the system will always perform an open transition when switching the load from the mains to the generator or when returning to the mains. The parallel run stages of the sequence are not used when operating in this way. NOTE: - When synchronising is enabled, the mains supply is checked before closing any load switching device. If the supply is live, synchronising will take place before any closure takes place.
  • 83. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 83 6.7 TEST OPERATION Test operation is used to perform a full on load test sequence to allow for diagnosis of faults. Alternatively, it may also be used to provide continuity of supply during expected black out events, peak lopping or peak shaving during high tariff periods. NOTE: - If a digital input configured to panel lock is active, changing module modes will not be possible. Viewing the instruments and event log is NOT affected by panel lock. If panel lock is active the Panel lock indicator (if configured) illuminates. TEST mode is initiated by pressing the pushbutton. An LED besides the button will illuminate to confirm this operation. When the START button is operated, the module will initiate the start sequence. NOTE: - There is no Start Delay in this mode of operation. If the pre-heat output option has been selected, this timer will initiate and the auxiliary output selected will be energised. After the above delay, the Fuel Solenoid (or ECU output if configured) is energised, and then one second later, the Starter Motor is engaged. NOTE: - If the unit has been configured for CAN Bus, compatible ECU’s will receive the start command via CAN Bus. Refer to the Manual CAN and DSE Wiring. Part No. 057-004 for more information on utilising DSE modules with electronically controlled engines. The engine is cranked for a pre-set time. If the engine fails to fire during this cranking attempt then the starter motor is disengaged for the pre-set rest period. Should this sequence continue beyond the set number of attempts, the start sequence will be terminated and Fail to Start will be displayed. Alarm Shutdown Fail to start When the engine fires, the starter motor is disengaged and locked out at a pre-set frequency from the Alternator output. Alternatively, a Magnetic Pickup mounted on the flywheel housing can be used for speed detection (This is selected by PC using the DSE Configuration Suite software). Rising oil pressure can also be used to disconnect the starter motor; however, it cannot be used for underspeed or overspeed detection. NOTE: - If the unit has been configured for CAN Bus speed sensing is via CAN Bus. After the starter motor has disengaged, the Safety On timer is activated, allowing Oil Pressure, High Engine Temperature, Under-speed, Charge Fail and any delayed Auxiliary fault inputs to stabilise without triggering the fault.
  • 84. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual Once the engine is running, the Warm Up timer, if selected is initiated, allowing the engine to stabilise before accepting the load. After the Warm-up timer has expired then the module will transfer the load from the mains supply to the generator output. It will observe the following sequence. The Generator will first be instructed to synchronise with the mains supply. Once these are matched the Generator Contact/Breaker will be instructed to close. The load will then be ramped from the Mains to the appropriate level on the generator. It will remain in this state whilst in the TEST mode unless the configuration (Advanced Options-Test mode) is configured for Run Mode=Island mode. If the module has an active remote start in island mode input or the internal scheduler has been configured for island mode then the parallel run time will activate. When this expires, the load will ramp off the mains supply and onto the generator. The Mains Contactor/Breaker will be instructed to open The generator will then supply the requirements of the load. NOTE:-A load transfer will not be initiated until the Oil Pressure has risen. This prevents excessive 84 wear on the engine. The system will then remain in this mode of operation until a different mode is selected. It is recommended that mode is used to cancel the TEST mode. When mode is selected the Stop delay timer is initiated. Once it has expired, the set is synchronised and paralleled with the mains supply. The system remains in this condition until expiry of the Parallel run timer. Once this has expired the module will ramp the remaining load from the generator to mains supply. The Generator Contact/Breaker will open and the Cooling timer is then initiated, allowing the engine a cooling down period off load before shutting down. Once the Cooling timer expires the Fuel Solenoid is de-energised, bringing the generator to a stop. During the parallel run the module can be configured to either run at a fixed level output, or to maintain an output in relation to the load level on the mains. For full details of these mode please refer to the manual ‘The Guide to sync and load share Pt1’ NOTE:- When synchronising is enabled, the mains supply is checked before closing any load switching device. If the supply is live, synchronising will take place before any closure takes place. NOTE:- Synchronising can be disabled if the application does not require this function. Contact your genset supplier in the first instance for further details.
  • 85. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual Number of present alarms. This is alarm 1 of a total of 2 present alarms 85 7 PROTECTIONS When an alarm is present, the Audible Alarm will sound and the Common alarm LED if configured will illuminate. The audible alarm can be silenced by pressing the Mute button The LCD display will jump from the ‘Information page’ to display the Alarm Page Alarm 1/2 Warning Low oil pressure The LCD will display multiple alarms E.g. “High Engine Temperature shutdown”, “Emergency Stop” and “Low Coolant Warning”. These will automatically scroll in the order that they occurred. In the event of a warning alarm, the LCD will display the appropriate text. If a shutdown then occurs, the module will again display the appropriate text. Example:- Alarm 1/2 Warning Oil pressure Low Alarm 2/2 Shutdown Coolant Temperature High The type of alarm. E.g. Shutdown or warning The nature of alarm, e.g. Low oil pressure
  • 86. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 86 7.1 PROTECTIONS DISABLED User configuration is possible to prevent Shutdown / Electrical Trip alarms from stopping the engine. Under such conditions, Protections Disabled will appear on the module display to inform the operator of this status. This feature is provided to assist the system designer in meeting specifications for “Warning only”, “Protections Disabled”, “Run to Destruction”, “War mode” or other similar wording. When configuring this feature in the PC software, the system designer chooses to make the feature either permanently active, or only active upon operation of an external switch. The system designer provides this switch (not DSE) so its location will vary depending upon manufacturer, however it normally takes the form of a key operated switch to prevent inadvertent activation. Depending upon configuration, a warning alarm may be generated when the switch is operated. The feature is configurable in the PC configuration software for the module. Writing a configuration to the controller that has “Protections Disabled” configured, results in a warning message appearing on the PC screen for the user to acknowledge before the controller’s configuration is changed. This prevents inadvertent activation of the feature. 7.1.1 INDICATION / WARNING ALARMS Under Indication or Warning alarms: · The module operation is unaffected by the Protections Disabled feature. See sections entitled Indications and Warnings elsewhere in this document. 7.1.2 SHUTDOWN / ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARMS NOTE:- The EMERGENCY STOP input and shutdown alarm continues to operate even when Protections Disabled has been activated. Under Shutdown or Electrical Trip alarm conditions (excluding Emergency Stop): · The alarm is displayed on the screen as detailed in the section entitled Shutdown alarms elsewhere in this document. · The set continues to run. · The load switch maintains its current position (it is not opened if already closed) · Shutdown Blocked also appears on the LCD screen to inform the operator that the Protections Disabled feature has blocked the shutdown of the engine under the normally critical fault. · The ‘shutdown’ alarm is logged by the controllers Event Log (if configured to log shutdown alarms) and logs that the Shutdown was prevented.
  • 87. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual Display Reason CAN ECU WARNING The engine ECU has detected a warning alarm and has informed the DSE module of this situation. The exact error is also indicated on the module’s display and action taken depending upon the setting for the DM1 signals ECU SHUTDOWN The engine ECU has detected a shutdown alarm and has informed the DSE module of this situation. The exact error is also indicated on the module’s display. ECU DATA FAIL The module is configured for CAN operation and does not detect data on the engine CAN datalink, the engine shuts down. 87 7.1.3 CAN ALARMS NOTE:- Please refer to the engine manufacturer’s documentation for Can error message information. CAN alarms are messages sent from the CAN ECU to the DSE controller and displayed as follows in the below tables. DM1 Signals. Messages from the CAN ECU that are configurable within the DSE module for:- Warning, Electrical Trip, shutdown or None Display Reason Amber Warning The CAN ECU has detected a Amber warning. Red Shutdown The CAN ECU has detected a Red Shutdown. Malfunction The CAN ECU has detected a Malfunction message. Protect The CAN ECU has detected a Protect message Advanced CAN alarms Allows configuration of additional can messages from the engine ECU. Display Reason Water in Fuel The ECU has detected water in the fuel action taken is set by settings in advanced. After Treatment The ECU has detected “After Treatment alarm” consult engine manufacturer for details” action taken by DSE controller is set by settings in advanced NOTE:- For CAN ECU error code meanings, refer to the ECU documentation provided by the engine manufacturer, or contact the engine manufacturer for further assistance.
  • 88. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 88 7.2 INDICATIONS Indications are non-critical and often status conditions. They do not appear on the LCD of the module as a text message. However, an output or LED indicator can be configured to draw the operator’s attention to the event. Example · Input configured for indication. · The LCD text will not appear on the module display but can be added in the configuration to remind the system designer what the input is used for. · As the input is configured to Indication there is no alarm generated. · LED Indicator to make LED1 illuminate when Digital Input A is active. · The Insert Card Text allows the system designer to print an insert card detailing the LED function. · Sample showing operation of the LED.
  • 89. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 89 7.3 WARNINGS Warnings are non-critical alarm conditions and do not affect the operation of the generator system, they serve to draw the operators attention to an undesirable condition. Example Alarm 1/1 Charge Failure Warning In the event of an alarm the LCD will jump to the alarms page, and scroll through all active warnings and shutdowns. By default, warning alarms are self-resetting when the fault condition is removed. However enabling ‘all warnings are latched’ will cause warning alarms to latch until reset manually. This is enabled using the 8600 series configuration suite in conjunction with a compatible PC. Display Reason AUXILIARY INPUTS If an auxiliary input has been configured as a warning the appropriate LCD message will be displayed and the COMMON ALARM LED will illuminate. CHARGE FAILURE The auxiliary charge alternator voltage is low as measured from the W/L terminal. BATTERY UNDER VOLTAGE The DC supply has fallen below the low volts setting level for the duration of the low battery volts timer BATTERY OVER VOLTAGE The DC supply has risen above the high volts setting level for the duration of the high battery volts timer FAIL TO STOP The module has detected a condition that indicates that the engine is running when it has been instructed to stop. NOTE:- ‘Fail to Stop’ could indicate a faulty oil pressure sensor or switch - If the engine is at rest check oil sensor wiring and configuration. FUEL USAGE Indicates the amount of fuel measured by the fuel level sensor is in excess of the Fuel Usage alarm settings. This often indicates a fuel leak or potential fuel theft. FAILED TO SYNCHRONISE, if the module cannot synchronise within the time allowed by the Synchronising timer a warning is initiated. The LCD will indicate ‘FAILED TO SYNC’ and the COMMON ALARM LED will illuminate AUXILIARY INPUTS Auxiliary inputs can be user configured and will display the message as written by the user. LOW FUEL LEVEL The level detected by the fuel level sensor is below the low fuel level setting. CAN ECU ERROR The engine ECU has detected a warning alarm and has informed the DSE module of this situation. The exact error is also indicated on the module’s display. kW OVERLOAD The measured Total kW is above the setting of the kW overload warning alarm EARTH FAULT The measured Earth Fault Current has been in excess of the earth fault trip and has surpassed the IDMT curve of the Earth Fault alarm. NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE Indicates ‘out of balance’ current loading of the generator. Sometimes also called Negative Sequence Current or Symmetry Fault MAINTENANCE DUE Indicates that the maintenance alarm has triggered. A visit is required by the Generator service company. MAINS REVERSE POWER if the 8620 detects that the generator is exporting more than the configured limit, the LCD will indicate ‘MAINS REVERSE POWER’ and the COMMON ALARM LED will flash LOADING VOLTAGE NOT REACHED Indicates that the generator voltage is not above the configured loading voltage. The generator will not take load when the alarm is present after the safety timer. LOADING FREQUENCY Indicates that the generator frequency is not above the configured loading
  • 90. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual NOT REACHED frequency. The generator will not take load when the alarm is present after the 90 safety timer. PROTECTIONS DISABLED Shutdown and electrical trip alarms can be disabled by user configuration. In this case, Protections Disabled will appear on the module display; The alarm text is displayed but the engine will continue to run. This is ‘logged’ by the module to allow DSE Technical Staff to check if the protections have been disabled on the module at any time. This feature is available from V4 onwards. LOW OIL PRESSURE The module detects that the engine oil pressure has fallen below the low oil pressure pre-alarm setting level after the Safety On timer has expired. ENGINE HIGH TEMPERATURE The module detects that the engine coolant temperature has exceeded the high engine temperature pre-alarm setting level after the Safety On timer has expired. ENGINE LOW TEMPERATURE The module detects that the engine coolant temperature has fallen below the high engine temperature pre-alarm setting level. OVERSPEED The engine speed has risen above the overspeed pre alarm setting UNDERSPEED The engine speed has fallen below the underspeed pre alarm setting GENERATOR OVER FREQUENCY The generator output frequency has risen above the pre-set pre-alarm setting. GENERATOR UNDER FREQUENCY The generator output frequency has fallen below the pre-set pre-alarm setting after the Safety On timer has expired. GENERATOR OVER VOLTAGE The generator output voltage has risen above the pre-set pre-alarm setting. GENERATOR UNDER VOLTAGE The generator output voltage has fallen below the pre-set pre-alarm setting after the Safety On timer has expired. INSUFFICIENT CAPACITY f the generator reach full load when they are in parallel with the mains (utility). The LCD will indicate ‘INSUFFICIENT CAPACITY’ and the COMMON ALARM LED will illuminate. MAINS FAILED TO CLOSE If the mains breaker fails to close, a warning is initiated. The LCD will indicate ‘MAINS FAILED TO CLOSE’ and the COMMON ALARM LED will illuminate. MAINS FAILED TO OPEN If the mains breaker fails to open, a warning is initiated. The LCD will indicate ‘MAINS FAILED TO OPEN’ and the COMMON ALARM LED will illuminate. ECU WARNING The engine ECU has detected a warning alarm and has informed the DSE module of this situation. The exact error is also indicated on the module’s display. If the module is configured for, CAN and receives an “error” message from the engine control unit, ‘Can ECU Warning” is shown on the module’s display and a warning alarm is generated. 7.4 HIGH CURRENT WARNING ALARM GENERATOR HIGH CURRENT, if the module detects a generator output current in excess of the pre-set trip a warning alarm initiates. The module shows Alarm Warning High Current. If this high current condition continues for an excess period, then the alarm escalates to a shutdown condition. For further details of the high current alarm, please see High Current Shutdown Alarm. By default, High Current Warning Alarm is self-resetting when the overcurrent condition is removed. However enabling ‘all warnings are latched’ will cause the alarm to latch until reset manually. This is enabled using the 8600 series configuration suite in conjunction with a compatible PC.
  • 91. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 91 7.5 SHUTDOWNS NOTE:- Shutdown and Electrical Trip alarms can be disabled by user configuration. See the section entitled Protections Disabled elsewhere in this document. Shutdowns are latching alarms and stop the Generator. Clear the alarm and remove the fault then press Stop/Reset to reset the module. Example Alarm 1/1 Oil Pressure Low Shutdown NOTE:- The alarm condition must be rectified before a reset will take place. If the alarm condition remains, it will not be possible to reset the unit (The exception to this is the Low Oil Pressure alarm and similar ‘active from safety on’ alarms, as the oil pressure will be low with the engine at rest). Display Reason EARTH FAULT The measured Earth Fault Current has been in excess of the earth fault trip and has surpassed the IDMT curve of the Earth Fault alarm. FAIL TO START The engine has not fired after the preset number of start attempts EMERGENCY STOP The emergency stop button has been depressed. This a failsafe (normally closed to battery positive) input and will immediately stop the set should the signal be removed. Removal of the battery positive supply from the emergency stop input will also remove DC supply from the Fuel and Start outputs of the controller. NOTE:- The Emergency Stop Positive signal must be present otherwise the unit will shutdown. LOW OIL PRESSURE The engine oil pressure has fallen below the low oil pressure trip setting level after the Safety On timer has expired. ENGINE HIGH TEMPERATURE The engine coolant temperature has exceeded the high engine temperature trip setting level after the Safety On timer has expired. FUEL USAGE Indicates the amount of fuel measured by the fuel level sensor is in excess of the Fuel Usage alarm settings. This often indicates a fuel leak or potential fuel theft. PHASE ROTATION The phase rotation is measured as being different to the configured direction. OVERSPEED The engine speed has exceeded the pre-set trip NOTE:-During the start-up sequence, the overspeed trip logic can be configured to allow an extra trip level margin. This is used to prevent nuisance tripping on start-up - Refer to the 8000 series configuration software manual under heading ‘Overspeed Overshoot’ for details.
  • 92. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual UNDERSPEED The engine speed has fallen below the pre-set trip after the Safety On timer has expired. Display Reason GENERATOR OVER FREQUENCY The generator output frequency has risen above the preset level GENERATOR UNDER FREQUENCY The generator output frequency has fallen below the preset level GENERATOR OVER VOLTAGE The generator output voltage has risen above the preset level GENERATOR UNDER VOLTAGE The generator output voltage has fallen below the preset level OIL PRESSURE SENSOR OPEN The oil pressure sensor is detected as not being present (open CIRCUIT circuit) AUXILIARY INPUTS An active auxiliary input configured as a shutdown will cause the engine to shut down. The display shows the text as configured by the user. LOSS OF SPEED SIGNAL The speed signal from the magnetic pickup is not being received by the DSE controller. ECU DATA FAIL The module is configured for CAN operation and does not detect data on the engine Can datalink, the engine shuts down. ECU SHUTDOWN The engine ECU has detected a shutdown alarm and has informed the DSE module of this situation. The exact error is also indicated on the module’s display. kW OVERLOAD The measured Total kW is above the setting of the kW overload shutdown alarm 92 NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE (DSE7000 series V2.0 or above only) Indicates ‘out of balance’ current loading of the generator. Sometimes also called Negative Sequence Current or Symmetry Fault MAINTENANCE DUE (DSE7000 series V2.1 or above only) Indicates that the maintenance alarm has triggered. A visit is required by the Generator service company. GENERATOR HIGH CURRENT A High Current condition has continued for an excess period, then the alarm escalates to either a shutdown or electrical trip condition (depending upon module configuration). For further details of the high current alarm, please see High Current Shutdown / Electrical Trip Alarm. LOADING VOLTAGE NOT REACHED Indicates that the generator voltage is not above the configured loading voltage after the safety timer. The generator will shutdown. LOADING FREQUENCY NOT REACHED Indicates that the generator frequency is not above the configured loading frequency after the safety timer. The generator will shutdown. PROTECTIONS DISABLED Shutdown and electrical trip alarms can be disabled by user configuration. In this case, Protections Disabled will appear on the module display; The alarm text will be displayed but the engine will continue to run. This is ‘logged’ by the module to allow DSE Technical Staff to check if the protections have been disabled on the module at any time. This feature is available from V4 onwards.
  • 93. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 93 7.6 ELECTRICAL TRIPS NOTE:- Shutdown and Electrical Trip alarms can be disabled by user configuration. See the section entitled Protections Disabled elsewhere in this document. Electrical trips are latching and stop the Generator but in a controlled manner. On initiation of the electrical trip condition the module will de-energise the ‘Close Generator’ Output to remove the load from the generator. Once this has occurred the module will start the Cooling timer and allow the engine to cool off-load before shutting down the engine. The alarm must be accepted and cleared, and the fault removed to reset the module. Example Alarm 1/1 Generator Current High Electrical Trip Electrical trips are latching alarms and stop the Generator. Remove the fault then press Stop/Reset to reset the module. Display Reason GENERATOR HIGH CURRENT If a generator output in excess of the high current alarm point, a warning alarm occurs. If this high current condition continues for an excess period, then the alarm escalates to either a shutdown or electrical trip condition (depending upon module configuration). For further details of the high current alarm, please see High Current Shutdown / Electrical Trip Alarm. AUXILIARY INPUTS If an auxiliary input configured as an electrical trip is active, the user configured message shows on the display. kW OVERLOAD The measured Total kW is above the setting of the kW overload Electrical Trip alarm EARTH FAULT The measured Earth Current is above the setting of the Earth fault alarm. FAILED TO SYNCHRONISE If the module cannot synchronise within the time allowed by the Synchronising timer a warning is initiated. The LCD will indicate ‘FAILED TO SYNC’ and the COMMON ALARM LED will illuminate MAINS REVERSE POWER if the module detects a mains reverse power in excess of the pre-set trip level and time delay, an electrical trip is initiated. The LCD will indicate ‘MAINS REVERSE POWER’ and the COMMON ALARM LED will flash. NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE Indicates ‘out of balance’ current loading of the generator. Sometimes also called Negative Sequence Current or Symmetry Fault FUEL USAGE Indicates the amount of fuel used is in excess of the Fuel Usage alarm settings. This often indicates a fuel leak or potential fuel theft. LOADING VOLTAGE NOT REACHED Indicates that the generator voltage is not above the configured loading voltage after the safety timer. The generator will shutdown. LOADING FREQUENCY NOT REACHED Indicates that the generator frequency is not above the configured loading frequency after the safety timer. The generator will shutdown. PROTECTIONS DISABLED Shutdown and electrical trip alarms is disabled by user configuration. In this case, Protections Disabled will appear on the module display; The alarm text is displayed but the engine will continue to run. This is ‘logged’ by the module to allow DSE Technical Staff to check if the protections have been disabled on the module at any time. This feature is available from V4 onwards. GENERATOR UNDER FREQUENCY The generator output frequency has fallen below the preset level
  • 94. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual GENERATOR UNDER VOLTAGE The generator output voltage has fallen below the preset level INSUFFICIENT CAPACITY If the module is configured for Mains CT and the load levels are so high that the generator is unable to supply enough load to maintain the configured mains level, insufficient capacity will be displayed and the COMMON ALARM LED will flash. The generator will provide 100% of its capacity and the loading on the mains will increase. UNDERSPEED The engine speed has fallen below the underspeed setting 7.7 HIGH CURRENT SHUTDOWN / ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARM The overcurrent alarm combines a simple warning trip level with a fully functioning IDMT curve for thermal protection. 7.7.1 IMMEDIATE WARNING If the Immediate Warning is enabled, the DSE8600 Series controller generates a warning alarm as soon as the Trip level is reached. The alarm automatically resets once the generator loading current falls below the Trip level (unless All Warnings are latched is enabled). For further advice, consult your generator supplier. 7.7.2 IDMT ALARM If the IDMT Alarm is enabled, the DSE8600 Series controller begins following the IDMT ‘curve’ when the trip level is passed. If the Trip is surpassed for an excess amount of time the IDMT Alarm triggers (Shutdown or Electric trip as selected in Action). High current shutdown is a latching alarm and stops the Generator. Remove the fault then press Stop/Reset to reset the module. High current electrical trip is a latching alarm and removes the generator from the load, before stopping the Generator after the off load cooling timer. Remove the fault then press Stop/Reset to reset the module. The higher the overload, the faster the trip. The speed of the trip is dependent upon the fixed formula: 94 T = t / ( ( IA / I T ) – 1 ) 2 Where: T is the tripping time in seconds IA is the actual current of the most highly loaded line (L1 or L2 or L3) IT is the delayed over-current trip point t is the time multiplier setting and also represents the tripping time in seconds at twice full load (when IA / IT = 2).
  • 95. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual Factory settings for the IDMT Alarm when used on a brushless alternator are as follows (screen capture from the DSE Configuration Suite PC software : These settings provide for normal running of the generator up to 100% full load. If full load is surpassed, the Immediate Warning alarm is triggered, the set continues to run. The effect of an overload on the generator is that the alternator windings begin to overheat; the aim of the IDMT alarm is to prevent the windings being overload (heated) too much. The amount of time that the set can be safely overloaded is governed by how high the overload condition is. With typical settings as above, the tripping curve is followed as shown below. This allows for overload of the set to the limits of the Typical Brushless Alternator whereby 110% overload is permitted for 1 hour. If the set load reduces, the controller then follows a cooling curve. This means that a second overload condition may trip much sooner than the first as the controller knows if the windings have not cooled sufficiently. For further details on the Thermal damage curve of your alternator, you are referred to your alternator manufacturer and generator supplier. 95 IT (Trip setting value) t (time multiplier)
  • 96. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 7.8 EARTH FAULT SHUTDOWN / ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARM When the module is suitably connected using the ‘Earth Fault CT’. The module measures Earth Fault and can optionally be configured to generate an alarm condition (shutdown or electrical trip) when a specified level is surpassed. If the Earth Fault alarm is enabled, the controller begins following the IDMT ‘curve’. If the Trip is surpassed for an excess amount of time the Alarm triggers (Shutdown or Electric trip as selected in Action). The higher the Earth Fault, the faster the trip. The speed of the trip is dependent upon the fixed formula : 96 T = K x 0.14 / ( ( I / Is)0.02 -1 ) Where: T is the tripping time in seconds (accurate to +/- 5% or +/- 50ms (whichever is the greater) K is the time multiplier setting I is the actual earth current measured Is is the trip setting value IS (Trip setting value) K (time multiplier setting) The settings shown in the example above are a screen capture of the DSE factory settings, taken from the DSE Configuration Suite software. 7.9 SHORT CIRCUIT ALARM If the Short Circuit alarm is enabled, the DSE8620 controller begins following the IDMT ‘curve’. If the Trip is surpassed for an excess amount of time the Alarm triggers (Shutdown or Electrical trip as selected in Action). The higher the Short Circuit, the faster the trip. The speed of the trip is dependent upon the fixed formula : T = K x 0.14 / ( ( I / Is)0.02 -1 ) Where: T is the tripping time in seconds (accurate to +/- 5% or +/- 50ms (whichever is the greater) K is the time multiplier setting I is the actual current measured Is is the trip setting value IS (Trip setting value) K (time multiplier setting) The settings shown in the example above are a screen capture of the DSE factory settings, taken from the DSE Configuration Suite software.
  • 97. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 97 7.10 ROCOF / VECTOR SHIFT When configured to run in parallel with the mains (utility) supply, the module monitors for ROCOF / Vector shift trips according to the module’s configuration settings. This is included within the module and will detect failure of the mains supply during parallel operation with the generator. NOTE:- This protection operates only when in parallel with the mains supply and is disabled at all other times. Should either of these alarms operate, the module will perform either a controlled shutdown (electrical trip) of the generator or will instigate the mains failure function. This operation must be manually reset : 1) Press button. The engine will stop if it is still running and the alarm is cleared. 2) Activate digital input configured to “Clear ROCOF/Vector shift” if this has been provided. 3) Press and button together and hold for 5 seconds. The ROCOF/Vector shift instrument is displayed and all ‘peak hold’ values are reset, clearing the ROCOF/Vector shift alarm. For details on activating and configuring the ROCOF/Vector shift protection you are referred to the DSE8620 software manual. 7.10.1 MAINS DECOUPLING TEST MODE To aid the testing of the mains decoupling features in the controller, a special test mode is included. This is activated by placing the module into STOP mode and enabling the ‘test mode’ in the module’s front panel ‘running editor’, described elsewhere in this document. This allows a ‘one shot’ test of the mains decoupling protection, enabling the Test Engineer to inject the necessary test signals into the DSE control and timing the reaction from application of the signal to activation of a DSE output configured to ‘combined mains decoupling’. The actual testing of mains decoupling must be left to experienced engineers and is outside the scope of DSE support.
  • 98. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 98 8 SCHEDULER DSE8600 Series contains an inbuilt exercise run scheduler, capable of automatically starting and stopping the set. Up to 16 scheduled start/stop sequences can be configured to repeat on a 7-day or 28-day cycle. Scheduled runs may be on load or off load depending upon module configuration. Example Screen capture from DSE Configuration Suite Software showing the configuration of the Exercise Scheduler. In this example the set will start at 09:00 on Monday and run for 5 hours, then start at 13:30 on Tuesday and run for 30 minutes. 8.1.1 STOP MODE · Scheduled runs will not occur when the module is in STOP/RESET mode. 8.1.2 MANUAL MODE · Scheduled runs will not occur when the module is in MANUAL mode. · Activation of a Scheduled Run ‘On Load’ when the module is operating OFF LOAD in Manual mode will have no effect, the set continues to run OFF LOAD 8.1.3 AUTO MODE · Scheduled runs will operate ONLY if the module is in AUTO mode with no Shutdown or Electrical Trip alarm present. · If the module is in STOP or MANUAL mode when a scheduled run begins, the engine will not be started. However, if the module is moved into AUTO mode during a scheduled run, the engine will be called to start. · Depending upon configuration by the system designer, an external input can be used to inhibit a scheduled run. · If the engine is running OFF LOAD in AUTO mode and a scheduled run configured to ‘On Load’ begins, the set is placed ON LOAD for the duration of the Schedule.
  • 99. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 9 SYNCHROSCOPE OPERATION 99 Hz +2.9 V +0.2 Initial stage of Synchronising display will only show the difference between the Mains Supply and the Generator Output. Here the display is showing a frequency mismatch of +2.9Hz - The genset frequency is too high (indicated by the arrow) and should be reduced. The voltage is +0.2 volts high, but is within the limits set for synchronising. Hz +0.9 V +0.2 Once the difference between the Mains and the Generator frequency has been reduced, the ‘Synchroscope’ display will become active. The moving bar will roll from one side to the other showing the phase of the two supplies. The area in the centre of the scope indicates the set limits for synchronising to occur. Hz -0.2 V +0.2 Synchronising will only occur when both the Frequency and the voltage differences are within acceptable limits - Indicated by ‘Tick’ marks on the top of the display. Then the moving bar display will show the phase difference. The engine speed will be automatically adjusted, altering the phase, until the moving bar enters the centre of the scope. Hz -0.2 V +0.2 Once the Mains and generator supplies are synchronised, the module will initiate a breaker close signal to load the generator onto the Mains. Should synchronism be broken the moving bar will pass out of the synchronising window. Note: - If the module display is showing the status page when the synchronising process begins, the module will automatically switch to the Synchroscope page. The ramp progress will also be displayed on the screen once paralleling has taken place.
  • 100. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 100 10 COMMISSIONING 10.1 COMMISSIONING SCREENS Commissioning screens are available to both aid the commissioning process and also to give additional information about the synchronising and load sharing process. These screens can be enabled and disabled in the module’s display editor. 10.1.1 SCREEN 1 L – L 0V kW 0.0 Average L-L Voltage and total kW Amps 0A kVAr 0.0 Load on the set(s) and total kVAr Pf ----- kW 0.0% Ramp level and % of full load kW Gov 0.0% Avr 0.0% Gov and Avr % of Drive 10.1.2 SCREEN 2 Tgt 0.0% kW 0.0% Target % and total kW Tgt 0.0% kVAr 0.0% Target % and total kVAr Pf ----- Ramp 5.0% Ramp level and % of full load kW Gov 0.0% Avr 0.0% Gov and Avr % of Drive 10.1.3 SCREEN 3 GL1 0A M L1 0A Generator L1 and Mains L1 Pf ----- Pf ---- Generator Power factor and Mains Power factor kW 0.0 kW 0.0 Generator kW and Mains kW kVAr 0.0 kVAr 0.0 Generator kVAr and Mains kW 10.1.4 SCREEN 4 MTgt 0.0% kW 0.0% Mains Target and mains actual kW MTgt 00.0% kVAr 0.0% Mains Target and mains actual kW Pf ----- Ramp 5.0% Power factor Ramp rate Gov 0.0% Avr 0.0% Governor Avr NOTE:- Some of the items may be removed from the commissioning screens if they are not applicable to the module configuration.
  • 101. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 11 FRONT PANEL CONFIGURATION This configuration mode allows the operator limited customising of the way the module operates. Use the module’s navigation buttons to traverse the menu and make value changes to the parameters: Next page Accept 101 Previous page Increase value / next item Decrease value / next item
  • 102. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 11.1 ACCESSING THE MAIN FRONT PANEL CONFIGURATION EDITOR Ensure the engine is at rest and the module is in STOP mode by pressing the Stop/Reset button. Press the Stop/Reset and Info buttons simultaneously. If a module security PIN has been set, the PIN number request is then shown : Press , the first ‘#’ changes to ‘0’. Press (up or down) to adjust it to the correct value. Press (right) when the first digit is correctly entered. The digit you have just entered will now show ‘#’ for security. Repeat this process for the other digits of the PIN number. You can press (left) if you need to move back to adjust one of the previous digits. When is pressed after editing the final PIN digit, the PIN is checked for validity. If the number is not correct, you must re-enter the PIN. If the PIN has been successfully entered (or the module PIN has not been enabled), the editor is displayed : NOTE: The PIN number is not set by DSE when the module leaves the factory. If the module has a PIN code set, this has been affected by your generator supplier who should be contacted if you require the code. If the code has been ‘lost’ or ‘forgotten’, the module must be returned to the DSE factory to have the module’s code removed. A charge will be made for this procedure. NB - This procedure cannot be performed away from the DSE factory. 102
  • 103. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 103 11.1.1 EDITING A PARAMETER Enter the editor as described above. Press the (left) or (right) buttons to cycle to the section you wish to view/change. Press the (up or down) buttons to select the parameter you wish to view/change within the currently selected section. To edit the parameter, press to enter edit mode. The parameter begins to flash to indicate that you are editing the value. Press the (up or down) buttons to change the parameter to the required value. Press to save the value. The parameter ceases flashing to indicate that it has been saved. To exit the editor at any time, press and hold the or button. NOTE: - The editor automatically exits after 5 minutes of inactivity to ensure security. NOTE: - The PIN number is automatically reset when the editor is exited (manually or automatically) to ensure security. NOTE: - More comprehensive module configuration is possible using the 86xx series PC configuration software. Please contact us for further details.
  • 104. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 104 11.2 ADJUSTABLE PARAMETERS Front Panel Configuration Editor. For descriptions of the parameters, you are referred to The DSE8600 series Configuration Suite Manual, DSE Part 057-119. Section Parameter as shown on display Values Display Contrast 53% Language English, others. Current Date and Time hh:mm Timers LCD Page Timer 5m Scroll Delay 2s Engine Pre Heat Timer 0s Engine Crank Duration 10s Engine Crank Rest Time 10s Engine Safety On Delay 10s Engine Smoke Limiting 0s Engine Smoke Limiting Off 0s Engine Warm Up Time 0s Engine Cool Down Time 1m Engine Speed Overshoot Delay 0s Engine Failed To Stop 30s Battery Under Voltage Warning Delay 1m Battery Over Voltage Warning Delay 1m Return Delay 30s Generator Transient Delay 0s Mains Mains Transient Delay 2s Mains transfer time 0.7s Mains Under Voltage Alarm 184V Mains Over Voltage Alarm 277V Mains Under Frequency Alarm 45Hz Mains over Frequency Alarm 55Hz Mains Transient Delay 2s CT Primary 600A CT Secondary 5A Mains KW Rating 345kW Mains KVar Rating 258kW Generator Under Voltage Shutdown 184v Under Voltage Pre-Alarm 196v Nominal Voltage 230v Over Voltage Pre-Alarm 265v Over Voltage Shutdown 277v Under Frequency Shutdown 40Hz Under Frequency Pre-Alarm 42Hz Nominal frequency 50Hz Over Frequency Pre-Alarm 54Hz Over Frequency Shutdown 57Hz Full Load Rating 500A kW Overload Trip 100% Delayed Over current Active Delayed Over Current 100% AC System 3 Phase 4 Wire CT Primary 600A Power Cycle After Exit CT Secondary 5A Power Cycle After Exit Short Circuit Trip 200% Earth CT Primary 500A Earth Fault Trip Active Earth Fault Trip 10% Transient Delay 0s Gen Reverse Power Delay 2s Full kW rating 345kW Full kVAr rating 258kVAr Load Ramp Rate 3% Gen Reverse Power 35kW Insufficient Capacity Delay 1s Insufficient Capacity action None Reactive Load CTL mode VAr fixed export Load Parallel Power 50% Load Power Factor 1.00pf 0 KVAr 0% Engine Oil Pressure Low shutdown 1.03bar Oil Pressure Low Pre-Alarm 1.24bar Coolant Temp High Pre-Alarm 90ºC Coolant Temp High Electrical Trip 92ºC (When Enabled) Coolant Temp High Shutdown 95ºC Start Delay Off load 5s Start Delay on load 5s Start Delay Telemetry 5s Pre Heat Timer 0s Crank Duration 10s Crank rest Time 10s Safety On Delay 10s Smoke Limiting 0s Smoke limiting off 0s Warm Up Time 0s Cool Down Time 1m Speed Overshoot Delay 0s Speed Overshoot 0% Fail To Stop Delay 30s Battery Under Volts Warning Active Battery Under Volts Warning Delay 1m Charge Alternator Failure Shutdown 5s (When Enabled) Charge Alternator Failure Shutdown Active, Inactive. Electronic engines only when droop is enabled. Charge Alternator Shutdown Delay Active, Inactive Droop % Active , Inactive (Only Available When Scheduler Is Active) Scheduler Scheduler Weekly, Monthly (Only Available When Scheduler Is Active) Schedule On Load Active , Inactive (Only Available When Scheduler Is Active) Schedule Period Weekly, Monthly (Only Available When Scheduler Is Active)
  • 105. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual Schedule Time & Date Selection (1-16) Press to begin editing then or when 105 selecting the different parameters in the scheduler. 11.3 ACCESSING THE ‘RUNNING’ CONFIGURATION EDITOR The ‘running’ editor can be entered while the engine is running. All protections remain active if the engine is running while the running editor is entered. Press and hold the button to enter the running editor. 11.3.1 EDITING A PARAMETER Enter the editor as described above. Press the (left) or (right) buttons to cycle to the section you wish to view/change. Press the (up or down) buttons to select the parameter you wish to view/change within the currently selected section. To edit the parameter, press to enter edit mode. The parameter begins to flash to indicate that you are editing the value. Press the (up or down) buttons to change the parameter to the required value. Press to save the value. The parameter ceases flashing to indicate that it has been saved. To exit the editor at any time, press and hold the button. 11.3.2 ADJUSTABLE PARAMETERS (RUNNING EDITOR) Running Editor (Factory default settings are shown in bold italicised text) Section Parameter as shown on display Factory Setting DISPLAY Contrast 53% Language English ) Load Demand priority (1) Load Power factor 0-100% (0) Load parallel power 0-100% (50) Enable commissioning screens Inactive, Active Override starting alarms Inactive, Active Voltage adjust (manual mode only engine running breaker open) 0-100 % (0) Frequency adjust (manual mode only engine running breaker open) 0-100 % (0) Enable mains decoupling test mode (Stop mode only) Inactive Active
  • 106. DSE Model 8620 AMF Controller Operators Manual 106 12 FAULT FINDING SYMPTOM POSSIBLE REMEDY Unit is inoperative Check the battery and wiring to the unit. Check the DC supply. Check the DC fuse. Unit shuts down Check DC supply voltage is not above 35 Volts or below 9 Volts when the module is operating. Run the system through a complete test and check the voltage remains within these limits consistently. Check the operating temperature is not above 70°C. Check the DC fuse. Warning fault operates Check relevant switch and wiring of fault indicated on LCD display. Check configuration of input. Continuous starting of generators when in AUTO Check that there is no signal present on the “Remote Start” input. Check configured polarity is correct. Check that the mains supply is within limits and load level on the mains is not above the configured level for mains “import/export”. NOTE: - The above fault finding is provided as a guide check-list only. As it is possible for the module to be configured to provide a wide range of different features always, refer to the source of your module configuration if in doubt.
  • 107. 12.1.1 EARTH FAULT TRIPPING CURVES NOTE: DSE Factory setting is time multiplier (K) = 0.4 DSE8620 Operating Manual Issue 1
  • 108. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 12.1.2 SHORT CIRCUIT TRIPPING CURVES NOTE: DSE Factory setting is time multiplier (K) = 0.01 108 Trip time (mS) Multiple of trip point setting
  • 109. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 12.2 COMMUNICATIONS OPTION 12.2.1 DESCRIPTION The 86xx series configuration software allows the 8620 controller to communicate with a PC. The computer can be connected to the module either directly, via a modem (RS232) or via an RS485 link. The operator is then able to remotely control the module, starting or stopping the generator, selecting operating modes, etc. The various operating parameters (such as output volts, oil pressure, etc.) on the remote generator can also be viewed. The information contained in this manual should be read in conjunction with the appropriate module documentation. This manual only details the operation of the communications software and how it should be used. The operation of the module is detailed in its own relevant manual. 12.2.2 CONTROLLER TO PC (DIRECT) CONNECTION To connect a 8620 to a modem the following items are required: - · Any 8620 Module · DSE Configuration Suite software (Available from the www.deepseaplc.com Website). 109
  • 110. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 110 12.2.3 MODBUS The RS485 output uses Modbus communications protocol. This uses a master-slave technique to communicate. Only the Master can initiate a packet transaction, called a ‘query’. When appropriate the slave (8620 Module) responds to the query and provides the information requested by the master. All supported data can be read and written as specified in the register table (documentation is available from Deep Sea Electronics Plc.). When the 8620 Module receives a query it will respond by either supplying the requested register data or performing the requested action. A slave device (the 8620 module) will never initiate communications on the Modbus™ link. The 8620 can only be configured as a slave device. The Master can only query individual slaves. Refer to the Modbus™ protocol document for more details. 12.3 IEEE C37.2 STANDARD ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM FUNCTION NUMBERS The DSE 8620 contains many protection devices and functions, which are listed in detail in the following sections. Functions and protections provided corresponding to IEEE C37.2 (1996) system device numbers are listed below. . Overall the 8620 is designated as 11 - Multifunction device and includes the following protections and functions: Device Description 2 time delay starting or closing relay A device that functions to give a desired amount of time delay before or after any point of operation in a switching sequence or protective relay system, except as specifically provided by device functions 48, 62, 79, and 82. 3 checking or interlocking relay A device that operates in response to the position of one or more other devices or predetermined conditions in a piece of equipment or circuit, to allow an operating sequence to proceed, or to stop, or to provide a check of the position of these devices or conditions for any purpose. 5 stopping device A control device used primarily to shut down equipment and hold it out of operation. (This device may be manually or electrically actuated, but it excludes the function of electrical lockout [see device function 86] on abnormal conditions.) 12 overspeed device A device, usually direct connected, that operates on machine overspeed. 14 underspeed device A device that functions when the speed of a machine falls below a predetermined value. 15 speed or frequency matching device A device that functions to match and hold the speed or frequency of a machine or a system equal to, or approximately equal to, that of another machine, source, or system. 18 accelerating or decelerating device A device that is used to close or cause the closing of circuits that are used to increase or decrease the speed of a machine. 25 synchronizing or synchronism-check relay A synchronizing device produces an output that causes closure at zero-phase angle difference between two circuits. It may or may not include voltage and speed control. A synchronism-check relay permits the paralleling of two circuits that are within prescribed limits of voltage magnitude, phase angle, and frequency. 27 undervoltage relay A device that operates when its input voltage is less than a predetermined value. 30 annunciator relay A non-automatically reset device that gives a number of separate visual indications upon the functioning of protective devices and that may also be arranged to perform a lockout function.
  • 111. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 111 31 separate excitation device A device that connects a circuit, such as the shunt field of a synchronous converter, to a source of separate excitation during the starting sequence. 32 directional power relay A device that operates on a predetermined value of power flow in a given direction such as reverse power flow resulting from the motoring of a generator upon loss of its prime mover. 46 reverse-phase or phase-balance current relay A device in a polyphase circuit that operates when the polyphase currents are of reverse-phase sequence or when the polyphase currents are unbalanced or when the negative phase-sequence current exceeds a preset value. 48 incomplete sequence relay A device that generally returns the equipment to the normal or off position and locks it out if the normal starting, operating, or stopping sequence is not properly completed within a predetermined time. 50 instantaneous overcurrent relay A device that operates with no intentional time delay when the current exceeds a preset value. 51 ac time overcurrent relay A device that functions when the ac input current exceeds a predetermined value, and in which the input current and operating time are inversely related through a substantial portion of the performance range.
  • 112. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 112 Device Description 52 ac circuit breaker A device that is used to close and interrupt an ac power circuit under normal conditions or to interrupt this circuit under fault or emergency conditions. 54 turning gear engaging device A device electrically operated, controlled, or monitored that functions to cause the turning gear to engage (or disengage) the machine shaft. 55 power factor relay A device that operates when the power factor in an ac circuit rises above or falls below a predetermined value. 59 overvoltage relay A device that operates when its input voltage exceeds a predetermined value. 62 time-delay stopping or opening relay A device that imposes a time delay in conjunction with the device that initiates the shutdown, stopping, or opening operation in an automatic sequence or protective relay system. 63 pressure switch A device that operates at a given pressure value or at a given rate of change of pressure. 69 permissive control device A device with two-positions that in one position permits the closing of a circuit breaker, or the placing of a piece of equipment into operation, and in the other position, prevents the circuit breaker or the equipment from being operated. 71 level switch A device that operates at a given level value, or on a given rate of change of level. 74 alarm relay A device other than an annunciator, as covered under device function 30, that is used to operate, or that operates in connection with, a visual or audible alarm. 78 phase-angle measuring relay A device that functions at a predetermined phase angle between two voltages, between two currents, or between voltage and current. 81 frequency relay A device that responds to the frequency of an electrical quantity, operating when the frequency or rate of change of frequency exceeds or is less than a predetermined value. 83 automatic selective control or transfer relay A device that operates to select automatically between certain sources or conditions in equipment or that performs a transfer operation automatically. 86 lockout relay A device that trips and maintains the associated equipment or devices inoperative until it is reset by an operator, either locally or remotely. 90 regulating device A device that functions to regulate a quantity or quantities, such as voltage, current, power, speed, frequency, temperature, and load, at a certain value or between certain (generally close) limits for machines, tie lines, or other apparatus.
  • 113. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 13 COMMISSIONING 13.1.1 PRE-COMMISSIONING Before the system is started, it is recommended that the following checks are made:- 10.1. The unit is adequately cooled and all the wiring to the module is of a standard and rating compatible with the system. Check all mechanical parts are fitted correctly and that all electrical connections (including earths) are sound. 10.2. The unit DC supply is fused and connected to the battery and that it is of the correct polarity. 10.3. The Emergency Stop input is wired to an external normally closed switch connected to DC positive. NOTE:- If Emergency Stop feature is not required, link this input to the DC Positive. The module will not operate unless either the Emergency Stop is fitted correctly OR terminal 3 is connected to DC positive. 10.4. Make all checks on the engine and alternator as detailed by their respective manufacturer 113 documentation. 10.5. Check all other parts in the system according to the manufacturer documentation. 10.6. Thoroughly review the configuration of the DSE controller and check that all parameters meet the requirements of your system. 10.7. To check the start cycle operation, take appropriate measures to prevent the engine from starting (disable the operation of the fuel solenoid). After a visual inspection to ensure it is safe to proceed, connect the battery supply. Select “MANUAL” and then press “START” the unit start sequence will commence. 10.8. The starter will engage and operate for the pre-set crank period. After the starter motor has attempted to start the engine for the pre-set number of attempts, the LCD will display ‘Failed to start. Select the STOP/RESET position to reset the unit. 10.9. Restore the engine to operational status (reconnect the fuel solenoid). Select “MANUAL” and then press “START”. This time the engine will start and the starter motor will disengage automatically. If not then check the engine is fully operational (fuel available, etc.) and the fuel solenoid is operating. The engine will now run up to operating speed. If not, and an alarm is present, check the alarm condition for validity, and check input wiring. The engine will continue to run for an indefinite period. At this time to view the engine and alternator parameters - refer to the ‘Description of Controls’ section of this manual. 10.10. Fully commission the engine/alternator and any other parts in the system as detailed in the respective manufacturer documentation. This includes load bank testing, load acceptance, breaker control and more. 10.11. When building a synchronising system, follow the DSE “4 Steps To Synchronising” as detailed elsewhere in this document before attempting to parallel the set with another supply. 10.12. Set the modules internal clock/calendar to ensure correct operation of the scheduler and event logging functions. For details of this procedure see section entitled Front Panel Configuration – Editing the date and time. 10.13. If despite repeated checking of the connections between the 8600 series controller and the customer’s system, satisfactory operation cannot be achieved, then the customer is requested to contact the factory for further advice on:- INTERNATIONAL TEL: +44 (0) 1723 890099 INTERNATIONAL FAX: +44 (0) 1723 893303 E-mail: Support@Deepseaplc.com
  • 114. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual Website : www.deepseaplc.com 114
  • 115. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 115 14 FAULT FINDING SYMPTOM POSSIBLE REMEDY Unit is inoperative Read/Write configuration does not operate Check the battery and wiring to the unit. Check the DC supply. Check the DC fuse. Unit shuts down Check DC supply voltage is not above 35 Volts or below 9 Volts Check the operating temperature is not above 70°C. Check the DC fuse. Unit locks out on Emergency Stop If no Emergency Stop Switch is fitted, ensure that a DC positive signal is connected to the Emergency Stop input. Check emergency stop switch is functioning correctly. Check Wiring is not open circuit. Intermittent Magnetic Pick-up sensor fault Ensure that Magnetic pick-up screen only connects to earth at one end, if connected at both ends, this enables the screen to act as an aerial and will pick up random voltages. Check pickup is correct distance from the flywheel teeth. Low oil Pressure fault operates after engine has fired Check engine oil pressure. Check oil pressure switch/sensor and wiring. Check configured polarity (if applicable) is correct (i.e. Normally Open or Normally Closed) or that sensor is compatible with the 73x0 Module and is correctly configured. High engine temperature fault operates after engine has fired. Check engine temperature. Check switch/sensor and wiring. Check configured polarity (if applicable) is correct (i.e. Normally Open or Normally Closed) or that sensor is compatible with the 8600 series module. Shutdown fault operates Check relevant switch and wiring of fault indicated on LCD display. Check configuration of input. Warning fault operates Check relevant switch and wiring of fault indicated on LCD display. Check configuration of input. Fail to Start is activated after pre-set number of attempts to start Check wiring of fuel solenoid. Check fuel. Check battery supply. Check battery supply is present on the Fuel output of the module. Check the speed-sensing signal is present on the 8600 series module’s inputs. Refer to engine manual. Continuous starting of generator when in AUTO Check that there is no signal present on the “Remote Start” input. Check configured polarity is correct. Generator fails to start on receipt of Remote Start signal. Check Start Delay timer has timed out. Check signal is on “Remote Start” input. Confirm correct configuration of input Check that the oil pressure switch or sensor is indicating low oil pressure to the controller. Depending upon configuration, then set will not start if oil pressure is not low. Pre-heat inoperative Check wiring to engine heater plugs. Check battery supply. Check battery supply is present on the Pre-heat output of module. Check pre-heat configuration is correct. Starter motor inoperative Check wiring to starter solenoid. Check battery supply. Check battery supply is present on the Starter output of module. Ensure that the Emergency Stop input is at Positive. Ensure oil pressure switch or sensor is indicating the “low oil pressure” state to the 8610 series controller. Engine runs but generator will not take load Check Warm up timer has timed out. Ensure generator load inhibit signal is not present on the module inputs. Check connections to the switching device. Note that the set will not take load in manual mode unless there is an active remote start on load signal. Synchronising or load sharing is not operating satisfactorily Follow the DSE “4 Steps To Synchronising” as detailed in the following section.
  • 116. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual SYMPTOM POSSIBLE REMEDY 116 Incorrect reading on Engine gauges Fail to stop alarm when engine is at rest Check engine is operating correctly. Check sensor and wiring paying particular attention to the wiring to terminal 47 (refer to appendix). Check that sensor is compatible with the 8600 series module and that the module configuration is suited to the sensor. Module appears to ‘revert’ to an earlier configuration When editing a configuration using the PC software it is vital that the configuration is first ‘read’ from the controller before editing it. This edited configuration must then be “written” back to the controller for the changes to take effect. When editing a configuration using the fascia editor, be sure to press the Accept button to save the change before moving to another item or exiting the fascia editor Set will not take load Ensure the generator available LED is lit Check that the output configuration is correct to drive the load switch device and that all connections are correct. Remember that the set will not take load in manual mode unless a remote start on load input is present or the close generator button is pressed. Inaccurate generator measurements on controller display Check that the CT primary, CT secondary and VT ratio settings are correct for the application. Check that the CTs are wired correctly with regards to the direction of current flow (p1,p2 and s1,s2) and additionally ensure that CTs are connected to the correct phase (errors will occur if CT1 is connected to phase 2). Remember to consider the power factor. Ie (kW = kVA x power factor) The 8600 series controller is true RMS measuring so gives more accurate display when compared with an ‘averaging’ meter such as an analogue panel meter or some lower specified digital multimeters. Accuracy of the controller is better than 1% of full scale. I.e. Gen volts full scale is 333V ph-n so accuracy is ±3.33V (1% of 333V). NOTE:- The above fault finding is provided as a guide check-list only. As the module is configurable for a range of different features, always refer to the source of your module configuration if in doubt.
  • 117. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 15 DSE 4 STEPS TO SUCCESSFUL SYNCHRONISING Synchronising and load sharing is often considered to be a complex subject. In fact, it is very simple when broken down into smaller steps. After following the Commissioning section of this manual, the 4 Steps must be followed before any parallel operation is attempted. The following information is a short form guide only, intended as a memory jogger once the steps are fully understood. The full video presentation of the 4 Steps is available on the DSE website. www.deepseaplc.com. Registration on the website is required. This is free of charge, along with all other downloads. This page is also available as a training document (handout style) from DSE. Part Number 056-001 Four Steps to Synchronising – included on the DSE website. 15.1 CONTROL 117 Check the control of the engine is working: · Control of AVR · Control of Governor · Direction of Control Failure of the above steps will result in poor control of the governor/AVR leading to problems during synchronising and/or load sharing if not corrected. 15.2 METERING · CTs on the Right Phase · CTs in the Right Direction Failure of the above steps will result in incorrect power factor and kW calculations leading to problems load sharing if not corrected. 15.3 COMMUNICATIONS · All Modules Connected on the MSC Link · Re-Calibrate, Sync + Load Control, Multi-Set · Remove One MSC Plug Failure of the above steps will result in the controllers being unable to communicate leading to problems during synchronising and/or load sharing if not corrected. 15.4 SYNC CHECKS · Use the Built in Sync Scope to Determine Correct Phase Wiring · Phase Checks across the Breaker. Failure of the above steps will result in serious damage to the system (breakers, bus bars, alternators, engines etc)
  • 118. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 16 MAINTENANCE, SPARES, REPAIR AND SERVICING The DSE8600 Series controller is Fit and Forget. As such, there are no user serviceable parts within the controller. In the case of malfunction, you should contact your original equipment manufacturer (OEM). 16.1 PURCHASING ADDITIONAL CONNECTOR PLUGS FROM DSE If you require additional plugs from DSE, please contact our Sales department using the part numbers below. 118 16.1.1.1 Pack of plugs Module type Plug Pack Part Number DSE8620 100-400-86 16.1.1.2 Individual plugs 8600 series terminal designation Plug description Part No. 1-13 13 way 5.08mm 007-166 15-19 5 way 5.08mm 007-445 22-38 MSC GOV AVR 17 way 5.08mm 007-452 39-46 V1 8 way 7.62mm 007-454 47-50 V2 4 way 7.62mm 007-171 51-57 7 way 5.08mm 007-447 60-70 11 way 5.08mm 007-451 PC Configuration interface lead (USB type A – USB type B) 016-125 NOTE:- Terminals 20, 21, 58 and 59 are not fitted to DSE8600 series controllers. 16.2 PURCHASING ADDITIONAL FIXING CLIPS FROM DSE Item Description Part No. 8600 series fixing clips (packet of 4) 020-294 16.3 PURCHASING ADDITIONAL SEALING GASKET FROM DSE Item Description Part No. 8600 series silicon sealing gasket 020-507
  • 119. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 16.4 DSENET EXPANSION MODULES NOTE:- A maximum of twenty (20) expansion modules can be connected to the DSENet®. NOTE:- DSENet® utilises an RS485 connection. Using Belden 9841 (or equivalent) cable allows for the expansion cable to be extended to a maximum of 1.2km. DSE Stock and supply Belden 9841 cable. DSE Part Number 016-030. 119 Item Description DSE Part numbers Max No. supported Model order number Sales literature Operator manual Installation Instructions 4 Model DSE2130 expansion input module provides additional analogue and digital inputs for use with the DSE8600 series controller. 2130-001-00 055-060 057-082 053-033 10 Model DSE2157 expansion relay module provides eight additional voltage free relays for use with the DSE8600 series controller 2157-001-00 055-061 057-083 053-034 10 Model DSE2548 expansion LED module provides additional LED indications, internal sounder and remote lamp test/alarm mute for use with the DSE8600 series controller. 2548-001-00 055-062 057-084 053-032 16.5 ETHERNET (LAN) CONNECTION NOTE: - DSE860 and DSE865 cannot be used with the DSE8620 although this module does have its own dedicated Ethernet port. (See beginning of manual for details)
  • 120. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual 120 17 WARRANTY DSE provides limited warranty to the equipment purchaser at the point of sale. For full details of any applicable warranty, you are referred to your original equipment supplier (OEM). 18 DISPOSAL 18.1 WEEE (WASTE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT) Directive 2002/96/EC If you use electrical and electronic equipment you must store, collect, treat, recycle and dispose of WEEE separately from your other waste. 18.2 ROHS (RESTRICTION OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES) Directive 2002/95/EC: 2006 To remove specified hazardous substances (Lead, Mercury, Hexavalent Chromium, Cadmium, PBB & PBDE´s) Exemption Note: Category 9. (Monitoring & Control Instruments) as defined in Annex 1B of the WEEE directive will be exempt from the RoHS legislation. This was confirmed in the August 2005 UK´s Department of Trade and Industry RoHS REGULATIONS Guide (Para 11). Despite this exemption, DSE has been carefully removing all non RoHS compliant components from our supply chain and products. When this is completed, a Lead Free & RoHS compatible manufacturing process will be phased into DSE production. This process that is almost complete and is being phased through different product groups.
  • 121. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual This page is intentionally left blank 121
  • 122. DSE Model 8620 Main Control and ATS Operators Manual This page is intentionally left blank. 122